Epson EPL-N4000 - 4000+ Rev B Service Manual

Laser Printer
EPSON EPL-N4000 / EPL-N4000+
SEPG98002

Notice
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic, mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being informed of them. The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly appreciate being informed of them. The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice:
Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright 1998 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. Printed in Japan.
PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.
DANGER
Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings. Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
WARNING
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR REPAIR PROCEDURES. 2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK. 3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN. 2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/ RATING PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO THE POWER SOURCE. 3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS. 4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS. 5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NONAPPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
About This Manual

This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of EPL-N4000/N4000+. The instructions and procedures included herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Contents
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix. CHAPTER 1. PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS Provides a general overview and specifications of the product. CHAPTER 2. OPERATING PRINCIPLES Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of the product. CHAPTER 3. TROUBLESHOOTING Provides the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting. CHAPTER 4. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product. CHAPTER 5. ADJUSTMENTS Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment. CHAPTER 6. MAINTENANCE Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing the product. APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference: Connector pin assignments Electric circuit boards components layout Exploded diagram Electrical circuit boards schematics
Symbols Used in This Manual

Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read WARNING, CAUTION or NOTE messages. Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
C A U T IO N
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment. May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
C H E C K P O IN T
Safety Information
To prevent accidents during a maintenance procedure, strictly observe the Warnings and Cautions. Do not do anything that is dangerous or not within the scope of this document. Do not do anything that is dangerous even if not specifically described in this manual. In addition to the descriptions below and those given in this manual, there are many situations and circumstances that are dangerous. Be aware of these when you are working with the printer.
Safety Precautions
POWER SUPPLY AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS Before starting any service procedure, turn off the printer and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. If you must service the printer with the power applied, be aware of the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks by following the procedures in this manual.
W A R N IN G
Do not touch any electrified component unless you are instructed to do so by service procedure.
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS If you service a driving assembly (e.g., gears), first turn off the power and unplug the power cord. Then manually rotate the assembly.
W A R N IN G
LASER ASSEMBLY
W A R N IN G
Do not try to manually rotate or stop the drive assemblies while the Main Motor is running.
This printer uses a laser as part of the printing process. The laser beam is a very powerful, straight, narrow beam of light that produces extreme heat at its focal point. The laser beam in this printer is invisible. Although you cannot see the beam, it can still cause severe damage. Direct eye exposure to the laser beam may cause eye injury or blindness. Never place a mirror or a reflective tool or object in the laser beam path.
To avoid permanent eye damage, follow these directions;

Before starting any service procedure, switch off the printer power and unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Do not disassemble the ROS Assembly or any laser component that displays a Laser Warning Sticker. Use caution when you are working around the ROS Assembly or when you are performing laser related repair procedures. Do not disassemble the printer in such a way that the laser beam can exit the printer engine during a print cycle.
Safety Components
Make sure fuses, interlock switches, covers and panels are all functioning properly after you have reinstalled or replaced them.
Warning/Caution Labels
WARNING and CAUTION labels are stuck on dangerous parts in the printer to make you aware of the potential dangers that are present when you are working with those parts.
Revision Status
Revision
Rev. A Rev.B
Issued Date
November 4, 1998 September 16, 1999 First Release
Description
Add EPL-N400+ and revise all chapters for EPL-N4000/N4000+
EPSON EPL-N4000/EPL-N4000+
Contents
Product Description
Features ........................................................................................................ 2 Changes from EPL-N4000 to EPL-N4000+ ................................................ 5 Basic Specification ...................................................................................... 8 Controller Specification ............................................................................ 8 Engine Specification ................................................................................. 9 Paper Specification ................................................................................ 10 Electrical Specification ........................................................................... 12 Reliability, Durability and Maintainability ................................................ 13 Safety Approval ...................................................................................... 15 Environmental Specification ................................................................... 16 Operating Environment(including optional parts) ............................... 16 Storage Environment(including optional parts) ................................... 16 Altitude ............................................................................................... 16 Vibration Tolerance ............................................................................ 16 External Dimension and weight .............................................................. 17 Other Specifications ............................................................................... 18 Consumables ......................................................................................... 18 Configuration .......................................................................................... 18 Host Interface Specification .................................................................... 19 Parallel Interface ................................................................................ 19 Ethernet Interface Specification ......................................................... 20 Type-B Interface ................................................................................. 22 OPERATION ............................................................................................... 23 Control Panel .......................................................................................... 23 Status Sheet ....................................................................................... 26 Panel Setting Mode ................................................................................ 26 One Touch Setting Mode .................................................................. 26 List of Setting Items ............................................................................ 27 Description of Setting Item and Model-dependent ............................. 35 Printing Menu ..................................................................................... 36 User setting items not included in the setting menu ............................... 43 Special Operation Functions .................................................................. 44 Maintenance Mode ................................................................................. 46 Operation ............................................................................................ 46 Engine Status Sheet .............................................................................. 47 Initialization Process .............................................................................. 51
Operating Principles
Mechanical Drive ....................................................................................... 53 Overview ................................................................................................ 53 Mechanical Drive Component ................................................................ 53 Offset Motor ........................................................................................ 54 Main Motor and Main Drive Assembly ................................................ 54 Lift Up Motor 1 and Lift Up Motor 2 .................................................... 55 Motor Control ...................................................................................... 55 Paper Path .................................................................................................. 56 Paper Path Components ........................................................................ 57 Paper Feed, Transport and Paper Eject Drive ....................................... 59 Mechanical drive for paper fed from the MSI ......................................... 59 Mechanical Drive for Paper Fed from Tray1 .......................................... 60 Mechanical Drive for Paper Fed from Tray2 .......................................... 60 Mechanical Drive for Registration .......................................................... 61 Mechanical Drive for the Drum and BTR ............................................... 61 Mechanical Drive for the Fuser .............................................................. 62 Mechanical Drive for Exit Drive .............................................................. 62 Mechanical Drive for Offset .................................................................... 63 Paper Path Component Control ............................................................. 63 ROS (Raster Output Scanner) .................................................................. 64 ROS Components .................................................................................. 64 Housed inside the ROS Assembly ..................................................... 64 ROS Operation ....................................................................................... 65 Image Resolution ............................................................................... 66 ROS Control ....................................................................................... 66 Print Process ............................................................................................. 68
Rev.B
Charge .................................................................................................... 69 Exposure ................................................................................................ 70 Develop .................................................................................................. 71 Transfer .................................................................................................. 72 Detack .................................................................................................... 72 Fusing ..................................................................................................... 73 Clean ...................................................................................................... 73 Print Sequence .......................................................................................... 74 Operating Principles for Power Supply Circuit ...................................... 76 Power Supply Circuit .............................................................................. 76 Power Supply Components .................................................................... 76 Printer Control ........................................................................................... 79 Printer Control Components ................................................................... 81 Machine Control Unit PWB (MCU PWB) ............................................ 81 Components attached to or associated with the MCU PWB: ............. 81 Function of the MCU during printer control ......................................... 85 Controller ................................................................................................ 87 Functions of the Controller ................................................................. 87 Specification on the Controller ........................................................... 87 Inoperative Main Drive Assembly ......................................................... 105 Inoperative Paper Feed Drive .............................................................. 107 J1-2 is not displayed when the EP Cartridge is out of toner ................ 108 Inoperative Interlock Switch ................................................................. 108 Inoperative Offset ................................................................................. 109 Image Quality FIPs .................................................................................. 110 Light(Undertoned) Prints ...................................................................... 111 Blank White .......................................................................................... 113 Black Prints .......................................................................................... 114 Vertical Band Deletions ........................................................................ 116 Horizontal Band Deletions .................................................................... 117 Vertical Streaks .................................................................................... 118 Horizontal Streaks ................................................................................ 119 Spot Deletions ...................................................................................... 121 Spots .................................................................................................... 122 Residual Image or Ghosting ................................................................. 124 Background .......................................................................................... 125 Skewed Image ..................................................................................... 127 Damaged Prints ................................................................................... 128 Unfused Image or Image Easily Rubbed Off ........................................ 129 Image not Registered Correctly ........................................................... 129 Secondary FIPs ....................................................................................... 130
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................ 90 Service Flowchart ................................................................................... 90 FIP Flowchart ......................................................................................... 91 How to use the FIP Flowchart ............................................................ 91 How to follow a FIP ............................................................................ 92 General Notes on Using FIPs ............................................................. 92 Printer Message ......................................................................................... 94 Printer Message ..................................................................................... 96 Service Req. Error .................................................................................. 99 Engine Error ....................................................................................... 99 Controller Error ................................................................................... 99 Operation when Service Req. Error Occurs ......................................... 100 Printer Performance Problems(not indicated by Error Codes) ........... 101 Inoperative Printer ................................................................................ 101 Erratic Operation .................................................................................. 103 Inoperative Control Panel ..................................................................... 104
Disassembly and Assembly

Overview .................................................................................................. 133 Cautions before starting ....................................................................... 133 Tools .................................................................................................... 133 Notations in the Manual ....................................................................... 133 Procedures for Disassembling .............................................................. 135 Fuser Full Cover ................................................................................... 138 Removal ........................................................................................... 138 Installation ........................................................................................ 138 Top Cover Assembly ............................................................................ 139 Removal ........................................................................................... 139 Installation ........................................................................................ 139 Rear Cover Assembly .......................................................................... 140 Removal ........................................................................................... 140 Installation ........................................................................................ 140
Rev.B
Right Cover .......................................................................................... 141 Removal ........................................................................................... 141 Installation ........................................................................................ 141 Control Panel ........................................................................................ 142 Removal ........................................................................................... 142 Installation ........................................................................................ 142 Rear Cover 1TM ................................................................................... 143 Removal ........................................................................................... 143 Installation ........................................................................................ 143 Tray 1 Lift Up Motor .............................................................................. 144 Removal ........................................................................................... 144 Installation ........................................................................................ 144 Tray 1 Feed Clutch ............................................................................... 145 Removal ........................................................................................... 145 Installation ........................................................................................ 145 Feed, Nudger, and Retard Rolls ........................................................... 146 Removal ........................................................................................... 146 Installation ........................................................................................ 146 Tray1 Take Away Roll Assembly .......................................................... 147 Removal ........................................................................................... 147 Installation ........................................................................................ 148 Tray 1 Feeder Assembly ...................................................................... 150 Removal ........................................................................................... 150 Installation ........................................................................................ 151 Support Assembly Spring ..................................................................... 152 Removal ........................................................................................... 152 Installation ........................................................................................ 152 Tray1 Retard Assembly ........................................................................ 153 Removal ........................................................................................... 153 Installation ........................................................................................ 153 Tray 1&2 Front Chute Assemblies ....................................................... 155 Removal ........................................................................................... 155 Installation ........................................................................................ 155 Tray 1 & Tray 2 Level Sensors ............................................................. 156 Removal ........................................................................................... 156 Installation ........................................................................................ 156 Tray1 & Tray 2 No Paper Sensors ....................................................... 157 Removal ........................................................................................... 157 Installation ........................................................................................ 157 Tray 1 & Tray 2 Paper Size Sensors .................................................... 158 Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Tray 2 Feed Clutch ............................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Tray 2 Feeder Assembly ...................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Tray2 Take Away Roll Assembly ......................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Tray 2 Retard Assembly ....................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) .............................................. Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Tray Assembly .............................................................................. Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Support Assembly ......................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Size Sensor Assembly .................................................................. Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Feed Clutch .................................................................................. Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Feed Roll ...................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Nudger Roll ................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Nudger Roll Assembly .................................................................. Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ MSI Pad ............................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... 158 158 159 159 159 160 160 161 162 162 162 163 163 163 164 164 164 164 164 165 166 166 166 167 167 168 169 169 171 172 172 172 173 173 173 174 174 174 175 175
Rev.B
Installation ........................................................................................ 175 MSI Friction Clutch ............................................................................... 176 Removal ........................................................................................... 176 Installation ........................................................................................ 176 MSI No-Paper Sensor Assembly .......................................................... 177 Removal ........................................................................................... 177 Installation ........................................................................................ 177 L/H Low Cover Assembly ..................................................................... 178 Removal ........................................................................................... 178 Installation ........................................................................................ 179 Left Lower Cover Assembly ................................................................. 180 Removal ........................................................................................... 180 Installation ........................................................................................ 180 Left Lower Cover Pinch Roll Assembly ................................................ 181 Removal ........................................................................................... 181 Installation ........................................................................................ 181 Left Lower Cover Interlock Switch ........................................................ 182 Removal ........................................................................................... 182 Installation ........................................................................................ 182 Tray 2 Take Away Sensor .................................................................... 183 Removal ........................................................................................... 183 Installation ........................................................................................ 183 Registration Clutch ............................................................................... 184 Removal ........................................................................................... 184 Installation ........................................................................................ 184 Left Upper Cover Assembly ................................................................. 185 Removal ........................................................................................... 185 Installation ........................................................................................ 186 Left Chute Assembly ............................................................................ 187 Removal ........................................................................................... 187 Installation ........................................................................................ 187 Registration Chute Assembly ............................................................... 188 Removal ........................................................................................... 188 Installation ........................................................................................ 188 Registration Roll Assembly .................................................................. 189 Removal ........................................................................................... 189 Installation ........................................................................................ 189 Registration Sensor .............................................................................. 190 Installation ........................................................................................ 190 Installation ........................................................................................ 190 ROS Assembly ..................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) ............................................................ Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ BTR Assembly (Transfer roller unit) ..................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Toner Sensor ....................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ CRU Interlock Switch ........................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Fuser Assembly ................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Fuser Drive Assembly .......................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Offset/Exit Assembly ............................................................................ Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Exit Drive Assembly ............................................................................. Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Exit Gate Solenoid ............................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Offset Motor ......................................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Face Up Exit Sensor ............................................................................ Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Offset Roller Assembly ......................................................................... Removal ........................................................................................... Installation ........................................................................................ Lower Chute Assembly ........................................................................ 191 191 191 192 192 192 194 194 194 195 195 195 196 196 196 197 197 197 198 198 199 200 200 200 201 201 201 202 202 202 203 203 203 204 204 204 205 205 205 206
Rev.B
Removal ........................................................................................... 206 Installation ........................................................................................ 206 Upper Chute Assembly ........................................................................ 207 Removal ........................................................................................... 207 Installation ........................................................................................ 207 Exit Roll Assembly ................................................................................ 208 Removal ........................................................................................... 208 Installation ........................................................................................ 208 Full Stack Sensor ................................................................................. 209 Removal ........................................................................................... 209 Installation ........................................................................................ 209 Inverter Clutches .................................................................................. 210 Removal ........................................................................................... 210 Installation ........................................................................................ 210 Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................ 211 Removal ........................................................................................... 211 Installation ........................................................................................ 213 Main Power Switch ............................................................................... 214 Removal ........................................................................................... 214 Installation ........................................................................................ 214 Low Voltage Power Supply(LVPS) Assembly ...................................... 215 Removal ........................................................................................... 215 Installation ........................................................................................ 215 AC Driver PWB ..................................................................................... 216 Removal ........................................................................................... 216 Installation ........................................................................................ 216 High Voltage Power Supply(HVPS) Assembly ..................................... 217 Removal ........................................................................................... 217 Installation ........................................................................................ 217 Noise Filter PWB .................................................................................. 218 Removal ........................................................................................... 218 Installation ........................................................................................ 218 Left Cover Interlock Switch Assembly .................................................. 219 Removal ........................................................................................... 219 Installation ........................................................................................ 219 MCU(Machine Control Unit) PWB ........................................................ 220 Removal ........................................................................................... 220 Installation ........................................................................................ 221 Controller Board ................................................................................... 222 Removal ........................................................................................... 222 ESS Box ............................................................................................... 223 Removal ........................................................................................... 223 Installation ........................................................................................ 223
Adjustment Maintenance
Maintenance ............................................................................................. 227 Exchange Units and Parts by User ...................................................... 227
Appendix
Connector Pin Diagram ......................................................................... 229 Pin Alighnment ..................................................................................... 229 How to use P/J location Table and Map ............................................... 231 Signal Information ................................................................................ 239 Board Component Layout ...................................................................... 251 C262 Main Board Component .............................................................. 251 Parts List .................................................................................................. 253 Top Cover Assembly ............................................................................ 253 Front Cover .......................................................................................... 254 Rear, Left and Right Cover .................................................................. 255 Tray Unit - Paper Stack ........................................................................ 256 Tray Unit - End Guide .......................................................................... 257 Tray Interface -Tray 1 ........................................................................... 258 Paper Pick Up - Tray 1 ......................................................................... 259 Retard and Take Away-Tray 1 ............................................................. 260 Tray Interface-Tray 2 ............................................................................ 261 Paper Pick Up-Tray 2 ........................................................................... 262 Retard and Take Away- Tray 2 ............................................................ 263 Feed Drive Transmission ..................................................................... 264 Multi Sheet Inserter and MSI/Duplex Support ...................................... 265 MSI Feeder Assembly .......................................................................... 266 Upper Feeder Assembly ...................................................................... 267 MSI Tray Assembly .............................................................................. 268 Tray 1 Frame and Left Cover ............................................................... 269 Tray 2 Frame and Left Cover ............................................................... 270
Rev.B
Registration .......................................................................................... 271 Left Upper Cover Assembly ................................................................. 272 Transport Chute Assembly ................................................................... 273 ROS Assembly ..................................................................................... 274 Xerography and Development .............................................................. 275 Fuser Assembly .................................................................................... 276 Exit Lower Chute .................................................................................. 277 Offset Roller ......................................................................................... 278 Exit Upper Chute Assembly ................................................................. 279 Exit Drive Assembly ............................................................................. 280 Main Drive Assembly ............................................................................ 281 Fuser Drive Assembly .......................................................................... 282 Power Inlet and LVPS .......................................................................... 283 HVPS and MCU PWB .......................................................................... 284 Controller Assembly ............................................................................. 285
Rev.B

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.1 Features
EPL-N4000/N4000+ is non-impact page printer applied with laser xerographic method.

Options: large-capacity paper unit (500 sheets(A4 to A3) on MP tray + 1000 sheets on cassette 1 + 1000 sheets (A4, Letter, and Executive sizes) on cassette 2) Refer to Table 1-6, Feeding Method, on page 10 for details. Offset stacking equipped as standard Wide range of options (Duplex Module, Face-up tray, Envelope Feeder, Multibin Unit, Finisher Stapler*, HDD*)
NOTE: Finisher Stapler and HDD are only supported from EPL-N4000+. Refer to Table 1-2 on page 4 for support range.
CONTROLLER FEATURES

Figure 1-1. Exterior View of EPL-N4000+ ENGINE FEATURES
High speed controller, employing new CPU 64-bit RISC CPU VR4700 133MHz SDRAM DIMMs adopted 64MB RAM equipped as standard Expandable up to 256 MB (using commercially available SDRAM DIMMs) However, 256MB SDRAM DIMMs cannot be used. Two standard interfaces IEEE 1284 parallel interface Ethernet interface (100Base-TX) 1 slot for Type B interface Type B Level 3 is supported from EPL-N4000+. Enhanced Micro Gray loaded

High speed & high reliability A3 engine. Resolution:600 dpi Printing speed:40 ppm (A4) / 40ppm (Letter) Standard paper feeders are two universal cassettes (500 sheets x2) and manual feed tray (50 sheets)
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
SOFTWARE FEATURES

Enhanced Micro Gray support, paper handling support Refer to the Adobe PS 3 kit specification Enhanced Micro Gray support, paper handling support EPL-N4000+ ESC/Page language has upward compatibility compared to EPL-N4000. Paper handling support Firmware updating function Adjusts engine. Not open to users. Enables to set printer configuration and network configuration using a web browser. Only English version is available and Internet Explorer 4.01 or above is necessary.
Supported emulation PCL5e PostScript Level3*1 ESC/Page
Rewriting flash ROM DIMMs Flash ROM DIMMs in slot A and the program slot can be rewritten from any I/F. (Not open to users except slot A.) Downloading of NLSP is written through slot A and inserted in slot C when used. When rewriting the firmware of Adobe PS 3 kit for EPLN4000 to Adobe PS 3 kit for EPL-N4000+, insert in slot A. Panel Setting

EPL-N4000: Available to set the printer mode, print menu and device menu individually by each languages environment interface EPL-N4000+: All modes except the printer mode are changed to the common environment with interface. Environment setting not by the panel operation is added
FX, ESC/P2,1239X PJL, EJL RCC DIAG EpsonNet WebAssist
Table 1-1. Printer environment setting not by the panel setting

EPL-N4000 Panel setting by Web Network setting by Web Network setting by ENPC --O --EPL-N4000+ O O O
NOTE: *1PostScript Level3 is optional. To be installed in slot A or B. Dedicated to EPL-N4000. Adobe PS 3 kit needs to be updated to EPL-N4000+, too.
Adobe PS 3 kit module EPL-N400 EPL-N4000+ EPL-N4000 EPL-N4000+
NOTE: O = Available -- = Not available
Firmware EPL-N4000 EPL-N4000 EPL-N4000+ EPL-N4000+
Print enable enable disable (invalid Adobe PS 3 kit error) enable
Finisher, HDD disable disable disable enable
Support range of EPL-N4000 and EPL-N4000+ For this product, firmware will be developed in two stages, EPLN4000 and EPL-N4000+. Firmware is stored in the flash ROM DIMM, and therefore it can be modified from EPL-N4000 to EPLN4000+. Each support range is as follows: The hardware is common.
Rev.B
Table 1-2. Support Range
Option Large capacity Paper Unit Duplex Module Multibin Unit; Mailbox Sorter Multiple Sorter Stacker Finisher Stapler; Stacker + Stapler Face-up Tray Envelope Feeder Collate printing (electronic sorter) RAM HDD EPL-N4000 O O O O O O -O O O -EPL-N4000+ O O O O O O O O O O O (The RAM sorter is not used when HDD is installed)
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
NOTE: Error will occur if the Finisher and HDD options are installed to EPL-N4000. The Multibin unit and Finisher Stapler cannot be installed at the same time. For installing the Multibin Unit of Finisher Stapler, the Large Capacity Paper Unit is required.
HDD option HDD is used up to 1 GB for spooling print data which are received via network. And the Adobe PS 3 kit Option used up to 1GB. Data spooling: When Network Menu/Buffer Size=Max is selected, received data is spooled in the HDD after the network receiving buffer becomes full.
Utilities for Printer Setting Table 1-3. Utilities for Printer Setting
Option EPL-N4000 O O ---O EPL-N4000+ -- (panel setting utility) --(Network Setting) O (panel, network setting) O (network control utility) O (network setting utility) --(included in the driver function with EPL-N4000+) O (installed with the printer driver) O
EPSON Remote Control Panel EPSON Net!2 for Intranet EpsonNet WebAssist (built-in) EosonNet Web Manager EpsonNet WinAssist, MacAssist EPSON Status Monitor 2
EPSON Status Monitor 3 EPSON Net Direct Print
---
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.2 Changes from EPL-N4000 to EPL-N4000+

Here explains the changes from EPL-N400 to EPL-N4000+. DIFFERENCE OF PANEL SETTING
Printing Menu, Device Menu ESC/PS Environment Menu and ESC/Page Environment Menu

Start ,menu, Initialization Menu are erased Setting Initialization = All setting in the Initialization Menu is added as Setting Initialization of Common Menu. One-touch is added to Printer Mode Menu
DESIGNED FOR FINISHER AND STAPLE The following are added to the panel settings.

Cover F Open Cover G Open Cover H Open Staple Cover Open Finisher Not Connect Stapler Supply Cant Staple (Warning) Staple Align (Warning) Check Stapler (Warning) Adobe PS 3 kit Hard Disk full Maintenance Req 0001-0013
Following message is erased from the printer message Optional device error
Setup Menu/Stacker Printing Menu/Staple
DESIGNED FOR ADOBE PS 3 KIT Printing Menu/Staple position Support Menu/HDD Format Support Menu/Adobe PS 3 kit HDD Init
The following is added to the printer messages.
Invalid Adobe PS 3 kit
The following are added to the printer message. Finisher Error yyy CantAdjustFnshrTray Finisher N Full Install Staple Crtg Cover E Open
MODIFIED ESC/PAGE

The following were added to the panel setting items.

PGI was added to ESC/Page Menu. ESC/Page was added to IES.
The following commands were added. Job clear (GS pcO)
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

graphics relative position coordinate mode 2 (GS 2 sarG) GS command encode (GS n1; n2ecE, GSn1;n2ec{E) stretch raster image compression 5 (GS n1; to;n6 srl) noPGI mode in gray color space
MODIFIED ESCP2,FX The emulation target was designed for Euro.

GW Byte to Aux Menu NetWare to Aux Menu Apple Talk to Aux Menu NetBEUI to Aux Menu AUX Init to Aux Menu
ADDED NETWORK PROTOCOL ENPC(EPSON Network Peripheral Control Protocol) protocol was added to the built-in network. Epson Net Web Manager, WinAssist and MacAssist were added to the utilities packed with the product.
RECEIVE DATA SPOOLING, ELECTRONIC SORTING AND PS FONT DOWNLOADING WERE ADDED FOR USE OF HDD The following were added to the panel setting items.

Support Menu/HDD Format Support Menu/Adobe PS 3 kit HDD Init DESIGNED FOR PANEL SETTING BY WEB All panel setting items were designed for setting from Web (EPSONNet WebAssist) EPSON Remote Control Panel was deleted from the utilities packed with the product.
The following were added to the printer messages. Invalid HDD Adobe PS 3 kit Hard Disk full
DESIGNED FOR TYPE B OPTION LEVEL3

MODIFIED PANEL SETTING The following panel setting items other than the above were modified.
D4 was added to MAIN System Type of Type-B I/F The following were added to the Panel Setting items.

AUX Status Sheet to Test Menu AUX Config to Aux Menu Get IP address to Aux Menu IP Byte to Aux Menu SM Byte to Aux Menu

The order of Test Menu was changed. It was designed that Binding would also appear in the Printing Menu when the finisher was installed. MP Mode was added to the Tray Menu Setup Menu/Auto Eject Page LANG=SUOMI in the Setup Menu was changed to KIELI=SUOMI.
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Setup Menu/Stacker Page Count in the Setup Menu was changed to Total Pages. Network Config was added to the Network Menu DHCP, a choice of Get IP Address in the Network Menu, was changed to Auto. Default values of IP Address, Subnet Mask and Default Gateway in the Network Menu were changed. The Support Menu was added. Total Counter Clear was moved after Fuser Counter Clear in the Maintenance Menu.
MODIFIED APPLE TALK ENTITY TYPE If Emulation is fixed for a certain language, the languages Entity Type and EPSONPAGE4 are returned.
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3 Basic Specification

1.3.1 Controller Specification
CPU
HOST INTERFACES
Host Interfaces:

Standard: Parallel IEEE 1284 compliant, bidirectional, B-type connector. Compatibility, Nibble, ECP Ethernet 10 BaseT/100BaseTX Option: Type B I/F slot (1 slot)
CPU: 64-bit RISC CPU VR4700 133MHz
RAM RAM: SDRAM DIMMs adopted
PRINTER SETTING
64 MB RAM fitted as standard (SDRAM DIMM type. However, 8MB is used as a system area)

By EJL, PJL, HTTP, SNMP and ENPC (EPL-N4000+) Memory element EEPROM serial type 16KB
DIMM option: 8MB*, 16MB, 32MB, 64MB, 128MB (SDRAM type, 2 slots) Maximum
CONTROL PANEL Control Panel:
NOTE: * 8 MB is rarely distributed and therefore, this is not stated in the catalog and specification.
ROM

Switch: LED: LCD:
8 switches 6 LEDs 20-character LCD
Fonts: Program:
2M bytes (mounted on main board) 4M bytes (mounted on flash ROM DIMM board)
MOUNTING Fixed on main unit HDD OPTION
Expansion ROM: 3 ROM DIMM slots (Can be mounted and removed only when power is off) Slot A: Adobe PS 3 kit or option fonts Slot B: Adobe PS 3 kit or option fonts Slot C: NLSP fonts Only one Adobe PS 3 kit can be mounted
HDD option:IDE type. 4GB or 6GB (TBD). Dedicated format for EPL-N4000. Required when finisher option is used. Can be used only with software of EPL-N4000+. Already formatted; no initialization required.
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
MISCELLANEOUS Mechanical control function is not built in.
1.3.2 Engine Specification
Printing Method: Electro-photographic printing, utilizing semiconductor laser beam scan and singlecomponent magnetic toner. Resolution: Printing Speed: Table 1-4. Printing Speed (PPM)
One-Side Printing MP Traya 32 (16) 19 (12) 31 (16) High Capacity Feederd C3 38 20 37 C4 37 -36 C5 35 -35 C1 28 14 28 C2 28 14 28 Duplex Printing MP Tray 27 13 27 High Capacity Feeder C3 26 13 26 C4 24 -24 C5 25 -22

600 dpi
Size A4 LC A3 Pd LT L
C1 40 20 40
C2 38 20 37
Note):
a: ( ) is for custom size(unfixed form). b. High(large) Capacity Feeder is optional. c: L means long edge first setting. d: P means short edge first setting.
Rev.B
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Time to print first sheet Table 1-5. Time to print first sheet(sec.)
One-Side Printing MP Tray High Capacity Feederd C3 11.1 11.1 C4 C5 C1 C2 15. 4 15. 4 12.0 13.2 14. 6 12.0 13.2 14. 6 Duplex Printing MP Tray TBD TBD High Capacity Feeder C3 15.7 15.7 C4 16.6 16.6 C5 17.8 17.8
Feeding Method Table 1-6. Feeding Method

Volume (sheet) 50a Paper thickness (g/m2) Normal Paper 60-90
Paper Feeding Method Standard MP(Multi purpose tray)
Paper Size Standard size paper (A3, B4, F4, Ledger, Legal, Government Legal, Executive) Custom size paper A4, B5, A5, Labels, OHP, Thick Paper, Letter, Government Letter, Half-Letter A3-L, B4-P, A4-L, B5-L, A5-L Labels, OHP-sheet, thick paper, Letter A3-P, B4-P, A4-L, B5-L, A5-L Labels, OHP-sheet, thick paper, Letter A3-L, B4-P, A4-L, B5-L, A5-L Labels, OHP-sheet, thick paper, Letter
Size A4 La LT L
C1 10.0 10.0
C2
10.8 TBD 10.8 TBD
5mm high
Note):
a: ( ) is for custom size(unfixed form). b. High(large) Capacity Feeder is optional.

Cassette 1 500 TBD Cassette 2 500 TBD High Capacity Feeder (Optional) Cassette 3 Cassette 4&5
Normal Paper 60-90 Thick Paper 90-190 Normal Paper 60-90 Normal Paper 60-90 Normal Paper 60-90 Normal Paper 60-90 Normal Paper 60-90 Normal Paper 60-90 Thick Paper 90-190

Warm-Up Time:
Within 60 seconds (at 23 C/rated voltage)
1.3.3 Paper Specification

Paper Feeding Maximum 6 ways: MP (Multi purpose tray), Cassette1, Casset 2, Cassette 3, Casset 4, Cassette 5. Paper Feed volume
Same as Cassette 2 Each 1000 TBD

Standard (No optional parts) 1050 sheets (50 + 500 x 2) When using optional parts 3550 sheets (Standard + 500 + 1000 x 2)
Note): a.:With 75g/m2 paper.
Rev.B
10
Table 1-7. Paper Size and Mounting Direction
Mounting Direction Paper Type Normal Paper Paper A3 A4 A5 B4 B5 B(LD) LG GLG LT Normal Paper GLT EXE HLT F4 Special Paper OHP Label MP Paper Size Tray 297 x 420 210 x 297 148 x 210 257 x 364 182 x 257 279.4 x 431.8 215.9 x 355.6 215.9 x 330.2 215.9 x 279.4 215.9 x 266.7 184.1 x 266.7 139.7 x 215.9 210 x 330 A4/LT A4/LT Pa L L P L P P P L L L L P L L C1 Pb L L P L P P P L -L L -L L C2 P L -P L P P P L -L --L L C3 P L -P L P P P L -L --L L C4,5 --c L --L ---L -L --L L Duplex printing Od O -O O O O O O O O -O --Face up Mailbox 200 Face down (Offset)a -Paper Eject Type Face down
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Supported paper size: Paper Feed Standard: Paper Eject
Width=100 to 297 mm Length=139.7 to 431.8 mm Only one side for each size and each paper feeding
Table 1-8. Paper Eject Volume

Volume (sheet) 500 Paper size/Type All size, type and Custom size. Normal Paper (Refer to Table1-7 Paper Size and Mounting Direction Same as Face-up Normal Paper (Refer to Table1-7 Paper Size and Mounting Direction Normal Paper 60-90 Thickness (g/m2) Normal Paper 60-90 Normal Paper 60-90 Thick Paper 90-190
100 sheet x each 10 mail box
Note): a.Standard function for the face down. Offset volume: Approx.20mm
Note): a.L: b.P: c.--: d.O:
Long edge first setting. Short edge first setting. Not available. Available.
Rev.B
11
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Guaranteed print area

1.3.4 Electrical Specification
Printable area 297 mm (width) x 431.8 mm (length) Guaranteed print area Entire paper area, excluding 4.0 mm from each edge of the paper.
Power Consumption (printer body) Table 1-9. Power Consumption

120V 200V 198 254V 50-60Hz3Hz Less than 5.2A Less than 1243W TBD
Input Voltage Rated Frequency Maximum Currency Power Consumption Maximum Continuous printing (Average) Power Saving (Stand-by) (Heater Off)
108 127V 50-60Hz3Hz Less than 9.6A Less than1180W TBD
4 m m
4 m m
4 m m
Less than 45W
Less than 45W

G u a ra n te e d p r in t a r e a
High Capacity Feeder (Optional) Average consumption electricity:Less than 0.6 A (24V) Less than 0.2A (5V) Mailbox (Optional) Average consumption electricity:Less than 0.6 A (24V) Maximum: Less than 2.0 A (24V) Average consumption electricity:Less than 0.2 A (5V) Duplex (Optional) Average consumption electricity:Less than 0.5 A (24 V) Less than 0.1 A (5V)

4 m m
Figure 1-2. Printable Area
AC Line Noise: Pulse width = 50 to 1000 ns Pulse polarity = +/Repetition = Asynchronous Modes = Common / Normal Voltage = 1KV (parts must be able to withstand 2KV without damage)
Rev.B
12
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Transient Outage:
DIP 100% (at rated voltage-100%) 1 cycle Less than 8KV No damage to image 1/2-cycle / Not above 100A
Electrostatic Tolerance: Surge Current:

1.3.5 Reliability, Durability and Maintainability

MPBF: Print Volume: 400,000 pages (one-side printing) Maximum 150,000 pages/month Average 25,000 pages/month Table 1-11. Paper Feed Reliability
Paper Jam Ratea Standard Environment MP Tray Cassette1, 2 High capacity feeder, Cassette 1/200 1/5000 1/5000 Average of all environment 1/100 1/2500 1/2500 Double Feed Rate Standard Environment 1/100 1/5000 1/5000 Average of all environment TBD 1/2500 1/2500
Insulation Resistance(TBD): Less than 10 M Dielectric Strength: Insulation shall not break down when the following voltage is applied between primary circuit and chassis for 1 minute.
Table 1-10. Dielectric strength

Primary-Chassis 100/120V 200 V Series AC1000V AC1500V Primary- Secondary AC2000V AC3000V
Leakage Current:
120V 3.5 mA or less 200V series 3.5 mA or less
NOTE: a. These figures are measured, assuming normal paper is used. This measurement does not apply when boundary face is generated. Boundary face is generated when the additional paper is added to paper already set.
Printing position reliability Table 1-12. Printing position

One-side printing duplex printing
2.4mm 1.9mm
MP Tray*
2.9mm 2.1mm
Main Scan direction Sub scan direction
2.0mm 1.5mm
Skew (See the figure on next page) Table 1-13. Skew

One-side printing duplex printing
2.4mm 1.9mm
MP Tray*
2.9mm 2.1mm
Main scan direction ( |c-d| ) Sub scan direction ( |a-b| )
2.0mm 1.5mm
NOTE: The measurements for MP Tray are based on one-side printing.
Rev.B
13
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
c a b
G u a ra n te e d p r in t a r e a
B o tto m d
Figure 1-3. Skew

Product Life: 1500,000 sheets or 5 years in use, whichever comes first. Maintenance: MTTR: Average less than 40 minutes.
Rev.B
14
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3.6 Safety Approval

Applicable Standard
Safety Regulation Table 1-14. Safety Regulation

Model 120V 200V series UL1950 2nd Edition CSA 22.2 No.950-M95 by UL(=cUL) IEC950 2nd Edition with amendment 1(1995) CE Directive
Power consumption: In compliance with International Energy Star program. Others:

Toner: No effect on human health. (In compliance with OSHA, TSCA, EINECS, worker safety laws and CSCL) OPC: No effect on human health. (In compliance with OSHA) Ozone:In compliance with UL478 5th Edition Materials: In compliance with Swiss environment protection law (no CdS content)
Safety Regulation(Laser Radiation) Table 1-15. Laser Radiation

Model 120V 200V series Applicable Standard FDA21 CFR Chapter1. Subchapter j,Section 1010, 1040. IEC 825 Class1 Laser Product
EMC Table 1-16. EMC

Model 120V 200V series Applicable Standard FCC Parts15 Subpart B, Class B CISPR Publication 22, ClassB(Taiwan) EN55022 ClassB EN61000-3-2 EN50082-1 AS 3548 (Australia) (TBD)
Rev.B
15
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3.7 Environmental Specification

1.3.7.1 Operating Environment(including optional parts)
Table 1-17. Operating Condition
Item Temperature Humidity Air Pressure(Altitude) 0 to 32 C 15 to 85%RH (without condensation) Less than 760 hPa(Less than 2500m) Condition

Direction Three directions(X,Y,Z) Time 50 minutes in each direction
1.3.7.2 Storage Environment(including optional parts)

Table 1-18. Storage Condition
Item Temperature Humidity Storage Normal 0 to 35 C 15 to 85%RH 12 months Extreme Low Temp.: -10 to 0 C High Temp.:35 to 40 C Low Humidity: 5 to 15%RH High Humidity:85 to 90% RH Max. 48 hours
1.3.7.3 Altitude
Storage 0 to 3000m (10000ft) Transportation 0 to 15000m (49200ft)

1.3.7.4 Vibration Tolerance

Vibration 5 to 100 Hz Acceleration 0.7G
Rev.B
16
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3.8 External Dimension and weight
Exterior dimension 642 mm (W) x 523 mm (D) x 486 mm (H) (No optional parts)
Figure 1-4. Exterior Dimension(No optional parts)
Figure 1-5. Exterior Dimension(with Mailbox, Duplex unit and High Capacity Feeder)
Rev.B
17
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Weight (No optional parts included) 41.1 Kg (120V) 43.6Kg (200V series) Optional parts weight

density, toner-save mode, etc.). ** This rotation corresponds to approximately 45000 sheets printing at A4 continuous printing(landscape setting). This OPC drum life is indicated by minute(s) calculated from the turn on the engine status sheet.
High Capacity Feeder: Less than 35 Kg Mailbox: Less than 16Kg Less than 6Kg(Bracket) Duplex Print Unit: Less than 5.5 Kg
How to distinguish

Method to distinguish: ID on the cartridge Type: Check OEM maker and if it is for Japan or for abroad.
1.3.9 Other Specifications
1.3.11 Configuration
In the EPL-N4000 controller the following settings can be configured. The settings are made with jumper resistors, and must thus be set at the factory.
Noise

Stand-by: Approx. 42(dB) Operating: Approx. 69(dB) Ozone Density: Less than 0.02 ppm Toxicity: OPC, Tonner and plastic materials are all nontoxic.
Settings: A4/Letter. LG, EXE/B4, B5 selection Table 1-20. Destination-dependent settings (INPT5)
R140 Mounted Not mounted R141 Not mounted Mounted Paper Size Detection B4, B5 LGL, EXE
1.3.10 Consumables
Components and life Table 1-19. Cartridge

Name Component OPC Drum Charging Roller Black -Toner Cleaner Blade Life Life: 20000 sheets* OPC drum: 130 k turn.** Weight 3.5Kg R129 Not mounted Mounted Factory setting for Printing Menu-Page Size A4 LT
ET Cartridge
Note)* Toner life is estimated based on continuous printing on A4 size with 5% print coverage. Toner life will vary according to print coverage and printing method (continuous or intermittent, print
NOTE: For the B4 and B5 settings, LGL and EXE must not be placed in the cassette. For the LGL and EXE setting, B4 and B5 must not be placed in the cassette.
Rev.B
18
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3.12 Host Interface Specification

EPL-N4000 has the following interfaces fitted as standard.
1.3.12.1 Parallel Interface

IEEE 1284 parallel interface Ethernet interface Option Type B slot

Interface type:I
IEEE 1284 bi-directional parallel interface
Operating mode: Compatibility, Nibble, ECP Connector type: 57RE-40360-830B(D7A)DDK or equivalent
Compatible plug: Amphenole or equivalent
O p tio n T y p e - B S lo t P a r a lle l I/F C o n n e c to r
The default device ID setting for this printer is as follows. The information is shown below including line breaks, but the actual data is a continuous character string, with no line break characters. The CMD items are not in order. The CID, MODE and STATUS items are not included. The DES item contents are MFG and MDL connected by a space. XXXX mentions products name.
E th e rn e t I/F C o n n e c to r
When Adobe PS 3 kit is not installed
fig 1 - 2
Figure 1-6. Interface Part The following table shows which host interface configurations can be used. Table 1-21. Interface
Parallel I/F I/F automatic selection I/F fixed(parallel) I/F fixed(Ethernet) I/F fixed (AUX) O O X X Ethernet I/F O X O X Type-B I/F O X X O
MFG:EPSON; CMD:PJL, ESCPL2, ESCP9,PRPXL24-01,PCL, HPGL2-01, ESCPAGE-04; MDL: XXXX; CLS:RPINTER; DES: EPSON XXXX;
When Adobe PS 3 kit is installed
MFG:EPSON; CMD:PJL, ESCPL2, ESCP9,PRPXL24-01,PCL, HPGL2-01, ESCPAGE-04,POSTSCRIPT; MDL: XXXX; CLS:RPINTER; DES: EPSON XXXX;
Note) O: Enable, X: Disable
Rev.B
19
With EPL-N4000+, MFG, MDL, DES and CID of Device ID are userredenfinable. The DES and CID fields dont respond with the default value, but respond with the defined character string only when redefined. Device ID upon redefinition is as follows. **** is a userdefined character string.
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3.12.2 Ethernet Interface Specification

Interface type:10BaseT, 100BaseTX, Half Duplex, Full Duplex: Automatically switched when power is turned on. Communication protocol
When Adobe PS 3 kit is not installed

IPX/SPX(IPX, SPX, NCP, RIP, SAP, PrintServer, RemotePrinter, NDS, SNMP,ENPC) NetBIOS(SMB), NetBEUI TCP/IP (IP, UDP, TCP, LPR, FTP, TELNET, ARP, ICMP, RARP, BOOTP, DHCP, SNMP, HTTP, SNMP, ENPC) Apple Talk (ELAP, DDP, ATP, PAP, AARP, NBP, ZIP, RTMP, SNMP, ENPC) ENPC (EPSON Network Peripheral Control Protocol) from EPLN4000+
MFG:****; CMD:PJL, EJL, ESCPL2, ESCP9,PRPXL24-01,PCL,HPGL2-01, ESCPAGE-04; MDL: ****; CLS:PRINTER; DES: ****; CID:****;
When Adobe PS 3 kit is installed
MFG:****; CMD:PJL, EJL, ESCPL2, ESCP9,PRPXL24-01,PCL,HPGL2-01, ESCPAGE-04; MDL: ****; CLS:PRINTER; DES: ****; CID:****;
Connector type:RJ45
ch103
Figure 1-7. RJ45 Connector/Pin Position
Appropriate cable:2-pair STP (10 BaseT, 100BaseTX) For compliance with FCC class B, EN55022 Class B, and VCCI ClassB, a shielded type cable must be used.
Rev.B
20
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Pin Assignments Table 1-22. Pin Assignment

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Signal Tx+ TxRx+ N.C. N.C. RxN.C. N.C. I/O O O I ----I -----
NOTE: *1 Added with Adobe PS 3 kit is installed. *2 RCC and DIAG cannot be selected by users.

Printer Name: Product Name:
Factory default setting is the same as Product Name Product Name
Emulation Type: See the table below Entity Type: See the table below. When Emulation is Auto, as it is shown in the table. When Emulation is fixed, Entity Type of default Emulation and EPSONPAGE4 are returned. Table 1-23. Emulation/Entity Type
Emulation PS*1 ESC/Page LJ4 RCC*2 DIAG*2 I239X GL/2 FX ESCP2 Emulation Type POSTSCRIPT-00*1 ESCPAGE-04 PCL5E-00 --PRPXL24-01 HPGL2-01 ESCP9 ESCPL2 --EPSONPRPXL24 EPSONHPGL2 EPSONFX EPSONLQ2 Entity Type LaserWriter*1
Rev.B
21
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.3.12.3 Type-B Interface

This printer is fitted as standard with a Type B option interface slot.

Main system type:MTP600dpi, PW7016dt600dpi, PRG(****)rev, AP1300ma, SPD0fast, D4**** is ROM version. D4 is from EPL-N4000+. Designed for Level3. Printer Name: Product Name: Factory default setting is same as Product Name Product name
Emulation Type: When emulation is Auto, Adobe PS 3 kit not started: AUTO (Emulation Type 1,2,3..) Adobe PS 3 kit started: EJL (POSTSCRIPT-00, other Emulation Type 1,2,3...) When emulation is fixed, : EJL (Default Emulation Type, other Emulation Type 1,2,3...) Entity Type When Emulation is Auto, As shown in the table. When Emulation is fixed, Entity Type of default Emulation and EPSONPAGE4 are returned.
Emulation Type: See table below. Entity Type: See table below. Table 1-24. Emulation/Entity Type
Emulation PS*1 ESC/Page LJ4 RCC*3 DIAG*3 1239X GL/2 FX ESCP2 Emulation Type POSTSCRIPT-00*1 ESCPAGE-04 PCL5E-00 --PRPXL24-01 HPGL2-01 ESCP9 ESCPL2 Entity Type LaserWriter*1 EPSONPAGE4 EPSONPCL5 --EPSONPRPXL24 EPSONNHPGL2 EPSONNFX EPSONLQ2
NOTE: *1:Added when Kent is installed. *3:RCC and DIAG cannot be selected by users. The cassette paper size detection jumper setting is not affected.
Rev.B
22
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4 OPERATION
1.4.1 Control Panel
The control panel of this printer has one display, 6 LEDs and 8 switches. Figure below shows exterior view of the control panel.
Off = No effective received data is left in the printer. But if the control code is not ended, LED is still On. Blinking = Processing the data.

Error(red):
Error happens and it can be canceled by Continue switch.
P a p e r S o u r c e P a p e r S iz e R IT e c h M e n u C o p ie s Ite m
M a n u a l F e e d M P T r a y S iz e V a lu e
O r ie n ta tio n
T o n e r S a v e M o d e
E n te r
One-Touch Setting Mode 1 LED (green): On = indicates that One-Touch setting mode 1 is selected. 4 items can be set; Paper Source, Selection, Paper size, Manual Feed, and Orientation. One- Touch Setting Mode 2 LED (green) On = indicates that One-Touch setting mode 2 is selected. 4 items can be set; RITech, Copies, MP Tray paper size and Toner Save Mode. Select Type Mode LED(green) On = indicates that the printer is in the select type panel setting mode.
O n -L in e
F o rm
F e e d
C o n tin u e
R e s e t
S e le c t T y p e

A L T
Figure 1-8. Control Panel LCD DISPLAY

Specification:20 characters in one row (5x7 dot matrix) Function: Usually, LCD display displays printer condition. In case of panel setting mode, setting is performed by the indication. SWITCHES
On-line:
LED LIGHTS

On Line LED(green):On = Printer is ready for printing. Off = Printer is not ready. Data(yellow): On = Received data is not printed out and still left in the printer. But if the received data except effective printing data is left, LED does not turn on.
The printer goes to not-ready state by pressing this button when the printer is in the on-line(ready) status. Pressing this button during the panel setting, the printer escapes from the panel setting mode and immediately goes to the On-line(ready) mode.
NOTE: If an error occurs after the printer goes to not-ready status, the printer goes to not-ready status even the error is canceled.
Rev.B
23
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Form Feed:If Data light is On in the not-ready condition, the printer prints the received data on the one sheet by pressing this button. If the plural numbers of printing is selected, the printer prints out that number. In case of the data which the control code has not ended yet, the printer prints out the data, which has already received.
C A U T IO N
NOTE: However, if the data light is off, the printer does not eject the paper.

Continue: Error is canceled by pressing this button, while the Continue LED light is on. When warning occurs, warning indication is canceled by pressing this button. Select type/Alt switch:Ordinary condition, One-touch setting mode1, 2 and select type mode. Menu switch: Item switch: The printer goes to the setting mode by pressing this switch. The printer goes to the previous setting item by pressing this switch.
This printer has EEPROM and hard disk drive HDD (option) inside and records various setting values and printing data. If the printer is turned off during this process, writing operation is not guaranteed, and error occurs when the printer is turned on next time. Therefore, never turn off the printer at the following cases; From the power on to On-line light on. On-line light is blinking When the printer is printing(when the paper transporting motor is in active) When you want to stop printing, press On-line switch or perform Job Cancel/Reset.
Each switch operation for the panel setting is on the next page.
Value selection switch:The printer goes to the previous setting item by pressing this switch. Enter switch: Reset(Continue): By pressing this button, the printer goes to status sheet in the test printing menu. The printer stops printing or resets by pressing Alt and Continue switches. After displaying Reset on the display, pressing both switches for 5 seconds lead to Reset All and executes warm boot.
Rev.B
24
Each switch operation for the panel setting is as follows. Table 1-25. Switch operation for the panel setting
On-line (ready) Goes to Not ready status and enters to One-touch setting mode1. Goes to select type mode Panel Setting mode Escape from the panel setting mode, and goes to On-line status. Menu selection (indicates next setting menu)*2 Panel setting (one touch mode) Goes to the next panel setting mode. Enter Goes to select type mode. Paper selection/ Printer mode selection (indicates the next setting value)*2 Paper selection/ Printer mode selection (indicates the next setting value)*2 Paper size selection/No. of Copy selection (indicates the next setting values) Paper size selection/No. of Copy selection (indicates the previous setting values) Minification selection/ Tray paper size selection*2 Goes to the item of the status sheet. Switch Alt + Value selection
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Table 1-26. Switch operation for the panel setting

On-line (ready) Invalid Not-ready Invalid Panel Setting mode Displays the previous item.*2 Panel setting (one touch mode) Minification selection/Tray paper size selection (indicates the previous setting value)*2 Paper direction selection/ Toner saving selection*1 (indicates previous setting value) *2 Paper direction selection/ Toner saving (indicates previous setting value) *2
Switch Panel setting
Not-ready Goes to One-touch setting mode1.
Setting menu
Goes to the item of the status sheet.
Confirm the setting value. Prints out or perform processing. Invalid
Alt + Enter
Invalid
Invalid
Alt + setting menu
Invalid
Invalid
Menu selection (indicates previous setting menu)*2
Item selection
Goes to the previous setting mode.
Goes to the previous setting mode.
Item selection (next setting item is displayed)*2
Note) *1 When using duplex print function, select Duplex instead of Toner Save. *2If you keep pressing, it will be repeat input.
Alt + item selection
Invalid
Invalid
Item selection (previous setting item is displayed)*2
Value selection
Goes to the previous item.
Goes to the previous item.
Displays the next setting value.*2
Rev.B
25
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.1.1 Status Sheet

Engine Status Sheet is prepared and Jam Counter is not printed.
Hardware configuration Mounted memory for installed memory
When Adobe PS 3 kit is installed: Adobe PS 3 kit Menu, Error Sheet is added to Default Settings Adobe PostScript3 is added to Installed Emulation Version of Adobe PS 3 kit is added to Firmware Revision.
NOTE: For EPL-N4000, Finisher and HDD cannot be installed.
The memory size obtained by subtracting the program code size from the mounted memory is stated for Available Memory. The following legends indicate the fact that options are fitted.
1.4.2 Panel Setting Mode

Here explains panel setting mode which sets various function of the printer.

RAM DIMM: Type-B I/F:
Added to Installed Memory, Available memory AUX is added to Installed Interface.
Large Capacity Paper Unit: Lower Cassette 3, Lower Cassette 4, Lower Cassette 5 is added to Other Options. ENV Tray: ENV Tray is added to Other Options.
1.4.2.1 One Touch Setting Mode

By pressing Select Type(ALT) switch on the control panel, the printer enters to the one-touch setting mode1, then goes to the one-touch setting mode 2. Setting items at each setting mode are mentioned below. Table 1-27. One touch setting modes
Mode/Switch Setting Menu Paper source Printer mode Setting Item Page size Copies Setting Value Minification MP tray size Enter Orientation Duplex One touch setting mode1 One touch setting mode2
Face-up Tray: When Face-up Enable of Setup Menu = On, Faceup Tray is added to Other Options. Duplex Unit: Multibin: Finisher: HDD: Duplex Unit is added to Other Options. Multibin is added to Other Options. Finisher Stapler is added to Other Options. Hard Disk XGB is added to Other Options.
NLSP Font ROM: The option product name is added to Other Options. Font/Macro ROM: The option product name is added to Other Options.
Rev.B
26
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.2.2 List of Setting Items

The following is a list of the printer setting items. Note that the box in the Value column indicates the factory default setting. Table 1-28. Printer Setting
Menu Test Menu Item Status sheet Network Status Sheet*2 AUX Status Sheet*3 Adobe PS 3 kit Status Sheet*4 Adobe PS 3 kit Font Sample*4 ESC/Page Font Sample*5 LJ4 Font Sample ESCP2 Font Sample FX Font Sample I239X Font Sample Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, Adobe PS 3 kit*4, GL2 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, Adobe PS 3 kit*4, GL2 Auto, LJ4, ESCP2, FX, I239X, Adobe PS 3 kit*4, GL2 Value
NOTE: *1 The order of items appearing on the Test Menu varies depending on whether the version is EPL-N4000 or EPLN4000+. *2 Appears only when Interface=Auto or Network. *3 Appears only when Inteface=Auto or AUX at start-up with a Level3-capable Type B host interface (option) installed, and can then be executed from EPL-N4000+. Any other menu has been set or executed before executing this menu, shift to a printable state before execution. *4 Appears only when Adobe PS 3 kit is installed. *5 Not displayed on the panel. Not printed on the status sheet. Can be executed with EJL. *6 Appears only when Type B interface card is installed.
Emulation Menu
Parallel Network AUX*6
Rev.B
27
Table 1-29. Printer Setting
Menu Printing Menu Item Paper Source Page Size Value ENV*2, 3, LC1, LC2, Auto, LC3*4, LC4*4, LC5*4 A4*5, A3, A5, B4, B5, LT*6, B, HLT, LGL, GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, MON, C10, DL, C5, IB5, CTM Off, On Port, Land Face-down, Face-up*8, Stacker*9, Mailbox 1*10, Mailbox 2*10, Mailbox 3*10 to Mailbox 10*10, Sorter*11 1-999 1-999 Off, On 600, 300 Off, On On, Off (added in EPL-N4000+) Off, On Long Edge, Short Edge (changed in EPL-N4000+) Front, Back Off, On None, Staple (added in EPLN4000+) Left, Right (added in EPL-N4000+) MP*1, 2,
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Wide A4 Orientation Out bin Copies Quantity*12 Manual Feed Resolution Skip Blank Page*13 Auto Eject Page Duplex*14 Binding*16
Start Page*14 Offset Stacking Staple Staple position*50
NOTE: *1: Appears only when the MP tray is installed, and can then be selected. The MP tray does not support the envelope size to which the ENV tray corresponds. *2: An error will result if neither MP tray nor ENV tray is installed. Therefore, either tray is always present in a normal state. *3:Appears only when the ENV tray is installed, and can then be selected. *4: Appears only when the Large Capacity Paper Unit is installed, and can then be selected. *5: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is A4. *6:Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is LT. *7: CTM size:min. 100 x 139.7mm, max. 297 x 431.8 mm *8: Appears only when Face-up Enable=On is set, and can then be selected . :*9: Appears only when the multibin unit is installed and the printer is in Stacker mode and Finisher Stapler is installed, and can then be selected. *10: Appears only when the multibin unit is installed and the printer is in Mailbox mode, and can then be selected. *11: Appears only when the multibin unit is installed and the printer is in Sorter or MultiSort mode; can then be selected. *12: Not displayed on the panel. Not printed on the status sheet. Can be set with EJL, PJL and so forth. Not saved in NVRAM. *13: Only LJ4 mode and ESC/Page mode are valid. *14: Appears only when the optional duplex unit is installed. *15: Appears when the finisher is installed. *16:Appears when the optional Duplex Unit or the Finisher Staple is installed.
Rev.B
28
Menu Tray Menu Item MP Mode MP Tray Size*1 ENV Tray size*4 LC1 Size*5 LC2 Size*5 LC3 Size*8 LC4 Size*8 LC5 Size*8 MP Type*1 Value Normal, Last (Added in EPL-N4000+) A4*2, A3, A5, B4, LT, B5, B, HLT, LGL,GLT, GLG, EXE, F4, IB5 C5, DL, C10, MON A4, A3, A5, B4*6, LT, LGL*7, GLG, B, EXE*7, B5*6 A4, A3, B4*6, LT, LGL*7, GLG, B, EXE*7, B5*6 A4, A3, B4*6, LT, LGL*7, GLG, B, EXE*7, B5*6 A4, LT, EXE*7, B5*6 A4, LT, EXE*7, B5*6 Plain, Preprinted, Letterhead, Prepunched, Bond, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels Plain Plain, Preprinted, Letterhead, Prepunched, Bond, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels Plain, Preprinted, Letterhead Prepunched, Bond, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels Plain, Preprinted, Letterhead Prepunched, Bond, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels Plain, Preprinted, Letterhead Prepunched, Bond, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels Plain, Preprinted, Letterhead Prepunched, Bond, Recycled, Color, Transparency, Labels
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
ENV Tray*9 LC1 Type LC2 Type LC3 Type*10 LC4 Type*10 LC5 Type*10 Config Menu RITech Toner Save Density Top Offset Left offset T offset B*11 L offset B*11 Size Ignore Auto Cont Page Protect Image Optimum
On, Off Off, On 3, 4, 5, 1, 2 0.0, -150.0 to 150.0 mm step 0.5 mm 0.0, -150.0 to 150.0 mm step 0.5 mm 0.0, -150.0 to 150.0 mm step 0.5 mm 0.0, -150.0 to 150.0 mm step 0.5 mm Off, On Off, On Auto, On Auto, Off, On
NOTE: *1:Appears only when the MP tray is installed, and can then be selected. The MP tray does not support the envelope size to which the ENV tray corresponds. *2: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is A4. *3: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is LT. *4: Appears only when the ENV tray is installed, and can then be selected. *5: Not displayed on the panel. Not printed on the status sheet. Can be extracted with EJL and so forth. *6: With the cassette size detect jumper setting as LGL and EXE, LGL is detected when B4 or LGL paper is placed in the cassette. EXE is detected when B5 or EXE paper is placed in it. *7: With the cassette size detect jumper settings as B4 and B5, B4 is detected when B4 or LGL paper is placed in the cassette. B is detected when B5 or EXE paper is placed in it. *8: Not displayed on the panel. Not printed on the status sheet. Can be extracted with EJL and so forth only when the Large Capacity Paper Unit is installed. *9: Not displayed on the panel. Always Plain on this model. Cannot be set with EJL, PJL and command. 10: Appears only when the Large Capacity Paper Unit is installed, and can then be selected. *11: Appears only when the Duplex Unit is installed.
Rev.B
29
Menu Setup Menu Item Interface*1 Time Out Standby*3 Lang Lang Sprache LINGUA LENG SPRK Sprog Taal KIELI Ling Panel Lock*14 Toner*15 Face-up Enable*16, 17 Multibin*7,8 Stacker*9 Value
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Total Pages*5 SelecType Init Parallel Menu Speed Bi-D Buffer Size*7
Auto, Parallel, Ethernet, Network, AUX*2 60, 0, 5 to 300 step1 Enable, Disable English, Francais Deutsch ITALIANO ESPANOL SVENSKA Dansk Nederl. SUOMI (changed in EPL-N4000+) Portugues Off, On E****F, E*** F, E** F, E* F, E F Off, On MailBox, Stacker, Sorter, Multisort +Face-down, No Face-down (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 99999999 (changed in EPL-N4000+)
Fast, Normal Nibble, ECP, Off Normal, Maximum, Minimum
NOTE: *1: EpsonNet WebAssist cannot set/change this item. *2: Appears only when the Type B interface card is installed. *3: The STANDBYTIME command (not open) of EJL is also supported. Its default value is 60 (minutes) *4: Not displayed on the LCD. Can be set with EJL. Not printed on the status sheet. *5: This item is for display only, and the setting cannot be changed. *6: This item must be set since installation of the face-up tray is not automatically recognized. The changed setting becomes valid after the next warm boot or the power is turned on again. *7: When changed on the panel or with EJL, these do not become valid immediately but become valid after warm boot or at power on again. Displaying on the panel, reading with EJL, and printing on the status sheet for themselves are immediately reflected. They are not reflected in the out bin setting range, language, network operation, etc. until warm boot is performed or the power is turned on again. If they are changed on the panel or with EJL, be sure to perform warm boot or turn on the power again. To change more than one of these, change more than one of them, perform warm boot or turn on the power again once at the end. *8: Appears only when the multibin unit is installed and can then be selected. When the setting is changed to terminate the panel setting mode, warm boot is performed. After the setting is changed, the test print menu is not displayed until the panel setting mode is terminated. It becomes valid after warm boot. *9: Appears when the Stacker can be selected as the outbin.
Rev.B
30
Menu Network Menu Item Network Get IPAddress*2,3 IP Byte 1*2,3 IP Byte 2*2,3 IP Byte 3*2,3 IP Byte 4*2,3 SM Byte 1*2,3 SM Byte 2*2,3 SM Byte 3*2,3 SM Byte 4*2,3 GW Byte 1*2,3 GW Byte 2*2,3 GW Byte 3*2,3 GW Byte 4*2,3 Buffer Size*3 AUX Config*5 Get IPAddress*5,6 IP Byte 1*5,6 IP Byte 2*5,6 IP Byte 3*5,6 IP Byte 4*5,6 SM Byte 1*5,6 SM Byte 2*5,6 SM Byte 3*5,6 SM Byte 4*5,6 GW Byte 1*5,6 GW Byte 2*5,6 GW Byte 3*5,6 GW Byte 4*5,6 Netware*5,6 AppleTalk*5,6 NetBEUI*5,6 AUX Init*5,6A Buffer Size*3 config*1 Value No, Yes (added in EPL-N4000+) Panel, Auto, PING (added in EPLN4000+) 192, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 168, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 192, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 168, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 255, 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) Normal, Maximum, Minimum
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
AUX Menu*4
No, Yes (added in EPL-N4000+) Panel, Auto, PING (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) 0 to 255 (added in EPL-N4000+) On,Off (added in EPL-N4000+) ON, Off (added in EPL-N4000+) ON, Off (added in EPL-N4000+) Normal, Maximum, Minimum
NOTE: *1: Automatically returns to Network Config =No after shifting to Ready. *2: Appears only when Network Config=Yes, and can then be selected. Always printed on Status Sheet. *3: When changed on the panel or with EJL, these do not become valid immediately but become valid after warm boot or at power on again. Displaying on the panel, reading with EJL, and printing on the status sheet for themselves are immediately reflected. They are not reflected in the out bin setting range, language, network operation etc. until warm boot is performed or the power is turned on again. If they are changed on the panel or with EJL, be sure to perform warm boot or turn on the power again. To change more than one of these, change more than one of them, perform, warm boot or turn on the power again once at the end. *4: Appears only when the TypeB interface card is installed. *5: Appears only a Level 3-capable Type B host interface (option) is installed, and can then be selected or executed. Automatically returns to AUX Config=No after shifting to a printable state. *6: Appears only when AUX Congig=Yes is selected, and can then be selected or executed. The setting value becomes valid when the network card is restarted after shifting to a printable state. Therefore, when the setting value is changed, if AUX Status Sheet in the test print menu is executed before coming out of the panel setting mode, the before change setting value is printed. Before setting or executing menus other than these items, shift to a printable state.
Rev.B
31
Menu ESC/Page Menu** Item Auto CR** Auto FF** CR Function** LF Function** FF Function** Error Code** Avoid Error** PGI** Font Source Font Number Pitch Height SymSet Value
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
On, Off On, Off CR, CR+LF LF+CR, LF FF+CR, FF Ignore, Space Off, On On, Off (added in EPL-N4000+)
LJ4 Menu
Form Source SymSet Dest SymSet CR Function LF Function
Resident, Download*1, ROM A*2, ROM B*2 0 to available (Max 65535) 10.00, 0.44 to 99.99 cpi step 0.01 cpi 12.00, 4.00 to 999.75 pt step 0.25 pt IBM-US, 8859-2 ISO, Roman-8, ECM94-1 IBM-DN, 8859-9 ISO, 8859-15ISO, Pc Multiling, PcE.Europe, PcTK437, PcEur858, WiiAnsi, PsTex, VeInternati, VeUS, MsPublishin, Math-8, PsMath, VeMath, PiFont, Legal, UK, ANSI ASCII, Swedis2, Ialian, Spanish, German, Norweg1, French2, Windows, PcIcelandic*4, PcLt774*4, PcTurk1*4,5, Pc Portugues*4, PcET850*4, PcTurk2*4,5, PcCanFrench*4, PcS1437*4, PcNordic*4, 8859-3 ISO*4, 8859-4 ISO,*4 WiBaltic*4, WiEstonian*4, WiLativian*4, Mazowia*4,6, CodeMJK*4,6, BpBRASCII*4, BpAbicomp*4, PcCy855*4,8, PcCy 866*4,8, PcLt 866,*4 WiGreek*4, Europe3*4, 8859-5 ISO*4, WiCyrillic*4, Bulgarian*4,8, PcUkr866, Hebrew7*7, 8859-8 ISO*4, PcAr864*4, PcHe862*4, Arabic8*4, OCR B*4, 8859-6 ISO*4, OCR A*4 60*10, 64*11, 5 to 128 lines 277, 0 to 3199 277, 0 to 3199 CR, CR +LF LF, CR+LF
NOTE: **: Not displayed on the panel. Not printed on the status sheet. Can be set and obtained with EJL. *1: Appears only when a down load font is present. *2: Appears only when an option font is installed in the ROM socket. *3:Either is displayed depending on the type of pitch of the font selected. Height is displayed for the fixed pitch font, and pitch for the proportional font. *4: Appears only when NLSP Bitmap3 Plus Font ROM is installed. *5:Appears only when NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Turkish is installed. *6: Appears only when NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Latin is installed. *7: Appears only when NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Greek is installed. 8: Appears only when NLSP EDG OEM Scalable Font ROM for Cyrillic is installed. *9: When LJ4 Menu SymSet Value is changed to this Symbol set, Font Source= Resident, Font Number=0 setting is automatically made, and therefore to print this symbol is set, a font must be selected for which the Font Source and Font Number Value are supported by this symbol set. *10: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is LT. *11: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is A4.
Rev.B
32
Menu GL2 Menu Item GL-Mode Scale Origin Pen Value GLlike, LJ4GL2 Off, A0, A1, A2, A3 Corner, Center Pen0, Pen1, Pen2*1, Pen3*1, Pen4*1, Pen5*1, Pen6*1 Butt, Square, Triangular, Round. Mitered, Miteredbeveled. Triangular, Round, Beveled, None. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. 0.050.355.00mm step 0.05mm. Menu ESCP2 Menu
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Item Auto CR Auto LF Bit Image ZeroChar Value
On, Off Off, On Dark, Light, BarCode 0,
End Join Adobe PS 3 kit Menu*2 Pen0 Pen1 Pen2*1 Pen3*1 Pen4*1 Pen5*1 Pen6*1
Error Sheet*2
Off, On Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Roman T, Orator S, Sans H, Script, OCR A, OCR B. 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, Prop. Off, On 0.400.501.50 inch step 0.05 inch 162*3 66*5available (Max 99) Lines PcUSA, Italic, PcMultiln, PcPortugue, PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2, PcE. Europe, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp, PcS1437*5, PcTurkish1*5, PcIcelandic*5, 8859-9 ISO*5, Mazowia*5, CodeMJK*5, PcGk437*5,PcGk851*5, PcGk869*5, 8859-7 ISO*5, PcCy855*5, PcCy866*5, Bulgarian*5, PcUkr866*5, Hebrew7*5, Hebrew8*5, PcAr864*5, PcHe862*5 USA, France, Germany, UK Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric, Korea,
NOTE: *1: Appears only in GLike mode. *2: Appears only when Adobe PS 3 kit is installed. *3: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is LT. *4: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is A4. *5: Appears only when NLSP Bitmap 3 Plus Font ROM is installed*6. *6: When LJ4 Menu SymSet Value is changed to this Symbol set, Font Source=Resident, Font Number=0 setting is automatically made, and therefore, to print this symbol set, a font must be selected for which the Font Source and Font Number Value are supported by this symbol set.
ESCP2 Menu Font
Pitch Condensed T. Margin Text CGTable
Country
Rev.B
33
Menu FX Menu Font Pitch Condensed T. Margin Text CGTable Item Value Courier, Prestige, Roman, Sans serif, Script, Orator S, OCR A, OCR B 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, Prop. Off, On 0.400.501.50 inch step 0.05 inch 62*1, 66*2, 1 to available (Max 99) Lines PcUSA, Italic, PcMultiln, PcPortugue, PcCanFrenc, PcNordic, PcTurkish2, PcE. Europe, BpBRASCII, BpAbicomp BpAbicomp, 8859-15ISO, PcEur858 USA, France, Germany, UK, Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain1, Japan, Norway, Denmark2, Spain2, LatinAmeric On, Off Off, On Dark, Light, BarCode 0, Courier, Prestige, Gothic, Orator, Script, Presentor, Sans serif 10cpi, 12cpi, 15cpi, 17cpi, 20cpi, 24cpi, Prop. 437, 850, 860, 863, 865 0.40, 0.30 to 1.50 inch step 0.05 inch 63*1, 67**2, 1 to available (Max:99) Lines Off, On Off, On Off, On Dark, Light, BarCode 0, 1*1, 2*2 Menu Support Menu*1 Maintenance Menu*4
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Table 1-37. Information Control and its Method

Item HDD Adobe PS 3 kit HDD Init*3 Engine Status Sheet Total Counter Clear Fuser Counter Clear LC1 Counter Clear LC2 Counter Clear LC3 Counter Clear*5 LC4 Counter Clear*5 LC5 Counter Clear*5 MP Counter Clear TR Counter Clear DM Counter Clear*5 FD Counter Clear FU Counter Clera*5 MB Counter Clear*5 Fin Counter Clear*5 Staple Count Clear*5 Error Log Clear Format*2 Value
Country
1239X Menu
Auto CR Auto LF Bit Image ZeroChar
Font Pitch Code Page T. Margin Text Auto CR Auto LF Alt.Graphics Bit Image ZeroChar CharacterSet
NOTE: *1: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is LT. *2: Factory default setting when the A4/LT configuration is A4.
NOTE: *1: Appears only when the printer is brought into Support mode by hidden operation at power-on. If n HDD is present, only the menu is displayed, and the items are not displayed. *2: Appears when the HDD unit is installed. *3: Appears when the Adobe PS 3 kit is mounted and the HDD unit is installed. *4: Appears only when the printer is brought into Maintenance mode by hidden operation at power-on. Always written in English regardless of the value of Lang in the Setup Menu. *5:Appears regardless of the optional unit installation state. Counter clear can also be executed.
Rev.B
34
The following is a list of user setting items not included in the setting menu. They are not cleared by Selc Type Init of the Setup Menu on the panel. Table 1-38. User Setting Items
Setting item Printer Name command MFG of Device ID MDL of Device ID DES of Device ID CID of Device ID Name of Mailbin 1 Name of Mailbin 2 Name of Mailbin 3 Name of Mailbin 4 Name of Mailbin 5 Name of Mailbin 6 Name of Mailbin 7 Name of Mailbin 8 Name of Mailbin 9 Setting 32-byte character string 32-byte character sting 32-byte character string 32-byte character sting 32-byte character string 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data 24 bytes of data Initial value Product Name (undefined) (undefined) (undefined) (undefined) Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Setting method EJL, PrinterName EJL EJL EJL EJL EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.2.3 Description of Setting Item and Model-dependent

Described below are model-dependent specification details of the setting items for this printer. TRAY MENU/MP TRAY SIZE

The paper sizes which can be set are limited and MON, C10, DL and C5 cannot be set. Although the MP tray has a paper width sensor, it cannot confirm the paper size. Therefore, the program refers to MP Tray Size set on the panel as usual. When Paper Set ssss ttt has occured and then is cleared, MP Tray Size changes to ttt if the specified size ttt matches the result of the paper width sensor differs from neither ttt nor MP Tray Size, it will be controlled as unfixed size, causing singlesize printing to be slow and duplex printing to be invalid. Therefore, the paper width guide must be set in place.
TRAY MENU/ENV TRAY SIZE

The paper sizes which can be set are limited and MON, C10, DL and C5 only are supported. The ENV tray also has a paper width sensor and its processing is the same as for the MP tray.
Name of Mailbin 10 24 bytes of data
TRAY MENU/MP TYPE, LC1 TYPE LC5 TYPE The type of paper placed on each paper feed unit is set. When Paper Source = Auto, used to select a unit also matching the paper type, from the paper feed units which match the specified paper size.
Rev.B
35
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

The paper type to be specified in paper feed selection is specified by the PCL5 command and ESC/Page command only. In a printer mode without such specification, the same operation as when Plain is specified is performed. No Paper Type settings are made on EPL-N4000. However, if the paper type settings (MP Type, LC1 to LC5 Type) are Trnsprncy and Prepunched, the settings will be set on the engine side. If the setting is Label, the engine is informed of cardboard for temperature control. (TBD)
1.4.2.4 Printing Menu

PRINTING MENU/OUT BIN Out Bin items which can be selected in accordance with the settings of Face-up Enable, Multibin and Finisher in the Set Up Menu are as follows. Table 1-39.
Multibin (Not installed) Face-up Enable Off Face-down Mailbox Facedown, Mailbox1 10 Facedown, Face-up Mailbox110 Sorter Facedown, Sorter Facedown, Face-up, Sorter MultiSort Facedown, Sorter Facedown, Face-up, Sorter Stacker Face-down, Stacker
TRAY MENU/MP MODE When trays are not specified by command, EJL, PJL, etc., MP Trays paper feed selection is prioritized. If the setting is Normal (factory default setting), MP Trays paper feed selection is given the highest priority (the same as the existing machine). If the setting is Last, MP Trays paper feed selection is given the lowest priority. Normal: MP Tray>LC1>...... Last: LC1>LC2>...>MP Tray This setting becomes valid after a warm boot.
On
Face down, Face-up
Face-down, Face-up, Stacker
Table 1-40.
Finisher (Not installed) Face-up Enable Off On Face-down Face-down, Face-up Stacker Face-down, Stacker Face-down, Face-up, Stacker
If Stacker is selected when the Multibin setting is Stacker, the 1500sheet large-capacity eject unit will be assumed. Paper ejection begins with Multibin 10. When Multibin 1 becomes full, paper is ejected to Face-down. From EPL-N4000+, switching to Face-down is disabled if Stacker=No Face-down. If Sorter is selected when the Multibin setting is Sorter, gathering
Rev.B
36
printing up to a quantity of 10 can be exceeds 10, a quantity of 1 only is ejected to Multibin 1 and the message Collate was disabled is displayed. If Sorter is selected when the Multibin setting is MultiSort, printing takes place by changing the multibin paper eject destination for each quantity. Quantity is set with EJL or ESC/Page. Paper ejection is carried out in the order of Multibin 1, 2, 3...When Multibin 10 is reached, paper ejection begins from Multibin1 again. If the specified quantity cannot be implemented due to insufficient memory, a quantity of 1 only is ejected to Multibin 1 and the message Collage was disabled is displayed. For mailbox bin selection, only one of 1 to 10 can be selected with the panel and PJL or EJL. More than one bin can be selected with the ESG/ Page command. If an item, which cannot be selected due to the operation mode of the paper eject unit, is specified by the ESC/Page command, that specification only is ignored and paper is ejected to the place specified on the panel. PAPER EJECT PORT SELECT SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Stacker=+Face-down : bin 10>bin 9>...>bin 1>Face-down Stacker=No Face-down : bin 10>bin 9>...bin1 (valid with EPLN4000+)
Finisher (valid with EPL-N4000+): When Out Bin= Stacker: The paper eject destination are in the order of bin 1>bin 2>bin 3>Face-down. For the first time after the power is turned on, a paper not empty bin is searched for from bin 3 to bin 1 to start paper ejection. For the second time and subsequent, a paper not empty bin is searched for from the previously paper ejected bin to start paper ejection. After there is no full bin, paper ejection starts from bin 1. Whether or not Face-down is used when the last bin becomes full is determined by the panel setting Stacker. If Stacker=+Face-down: Face-down is used without staple designation. The error Finisher 3 Full occurs and Face-down is not used with staple designation. If Stacker=No Face-down, the error Finisher 3 Full occurs and Face-down is not used.
Multibin: When Multibin=Stacker, Out Bin=Stacker: The paper eject destinations are in the order of (Multibins) bin 10, bin 9...bin1, Face-down. For the first time after the power is turned on, the program looks for a paper-eject full bin staring from Multibin 1 and begins paper ejection from a bin preceding the full bin. For the second time and subsequent, paper ejection begins from the last paper ejected bin. After there is not any full bin, paper ejection begins from Multibin 10. Whether or not Face-down is used when the last bin becomes full is determined by the panel setting Stacker. If Stacker=+Face-down, Face-down is used. If Stacker=No Face-down, Face-down is not used.
Rev.B
37
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
LIMITATIONS ON PAPER EJECT UNITS
Multibin (including when Multibin = Stacker and Out Bin = Stacker) If the Page Size settings are MON, C10, DL, C5 and CTM or the Type settings are Trnsprncy and Label, the message Outbin Select Error is displayed and paper is ejected to Face-down. This is the same as when the paper-fed tray size and type are those aforementioned. Finisher: If the page size setting is F4, GLT, IB5, (postcard), MON, C10, DL, C5 or CTM, the warning Outbin Select Error appears and paper is ejected to Face-down. The same occurs if the paper-fed tray size is any of the above. At this time, staple designation is ignored. The number of sheets and the number of copies that can be held in bin 1, bin2 and bin 3 are limited by the paper size and staple designation.
The number of sheets and the number of copies ejected are reset with no paper detection. Users should remove all paper from the stacker in advance when printing a large quantity of copies. Table 1-41.
Paper size LT, HLT, EXE, A4, A5, B5 LG, GLG, B, A3, B4 Without stapling 670 sheets 300 sheets With stapling 100 copies (TBD) 100 copies (TBD)
PRINTING MENU/QUANTITY This is the copy quantity setting when copying by quantity. This setting is specified taking preference over the Copies setting. When the printing quantity is 2 or more, the Copies setting will be 1. This setting can be specified only with the PJL, EJL, or ESC/Page command and the setting cannot be stored. If data for 1 job cannot be stored in the printer, the warning Collate wad disabled will be displayed and a quantity of 1 only will be printed. PRINTING MENU/DUPLEX Duplex printing or one-side printing is set.

Limitation of the number of sheets In A4-size, the bin becomes full with 670 sheets (TBD). Staple designation has no effect. In A3-size, sheets are counted as double the above. Limitation of the number of copies If stapled copies are mixed, the bin becomes full with 100 copies at maximum (TBD) in both A4 size and A3 size. Offset stacking is not considered.
However, the bin also becomes full with the full sensor. If there is paper in a finisher bin when the power is turned on, the bin becomes full with approx. 400 sheets. The above counted value and the last paper ejected bin are not be stored in NVRAM. The number of sheets and the number of copies ejected are reset when the power is turned on.
Limitations on duplex printing When the Page Size settings are A5, HLT, MON, C10, DL, C5 and CTM or the Type settings are Trnsprncy and Label or Paper Source is ENV Tray, the message Cant Print Duplex will be displayed and printing cannot be started. This is the same as when the size and type of the tray for which an attempt is made to feed paper are those aforementioned. If the paper type settings for the face and back differ from each other, a Cant Print Duplex error will result.
Rev.B
38
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
PRINTING MENU/OFFSET STACKING Specify whether to perform Offset Stacking when outputting paper to a paper eject unit with a shifter. This setting is for all the paper eject units and consequently, it is the setting item valid for Face-down and Finisher with a shifter on the EPL-N4000. When Multibin = Stacker and Out Bin = Stacker, Offset Stacking becomes invalid and paper is ejected to the center even if the bins to bin1 become full and Face-down switches to. Where print jobs with Offset Stacking = On and Off are mixed, the paper eject position does not move at a boundary when jobs with Offset Stacking = Off are successive but the paper eject position moves at the boundary if either preceding or following print job has Offset Stacking =On. If printing is not executed as requested due to reset processing or the occurence of a Collage was disabled warning, the paper eject position may be shifted. If one job or quantity contains pages with Offset Stacking = On and Off, the specification for the first page to be output to a paper eject with a shifter only becomes valid.
PRINTING MENU / STAPLE POSITION
Designate the staple position as a logic position L: Left-hand side R: Right-hand side (used for right-handed binding in Japan. This is not used in foreign countries)
GENERAL EXPLANATION OF STAPLE DESIGNATION

If the paper eject destination is not Stacker, designation is ignored and paper is ejected to the specified paper eject destination. No error occurs. If the finisher option is not present, designation is ignored. No error occurs. If the paper size cannot be sent to the finisher, designation is ignored. (Warning Outbin Select Error) If the paper size or type that can be sent to the finisher but cannot be stapled is designated, staple designation is ignored and paper is ejected. (TBD. There are no applicable size and type under the present circumstances) If an attempt is made to staple different-size paper, or to change the output bin to other than the Stacker during one job, paper is ejected from the compile tray without stapling. (Warning Cant Staple) No recovery is an erroneous stapling time. The warning Check Stapler occurs. If an attempt is made to print with staple designation when there is no staple, the error Staple Supply occurs. If an attempt is made to staple one sheet, paper is ejected from the compile tray without stapling.
Limitations on Offset Stacking When the Page Size settings are MON, C10, DL, C5 and CTM or the Type Settings are Trnsprncy, Label and Prepunched, Offset Stacking becomes invalid and paper is ejected to the center. This is the same as when Size or Type of the paper fed unit are those aforementioned.
PRINTING MENU / STAPLE
Designate stapling None: No stapling Single: Single stapling Double: Central double stapling 0
Rev.B
39
CHAPTER 1
Table 1-42.
Orientation Portrait Binding Shortedge Staple None Single Double L R L R Longedge None Single Double L R L R Landscape Shortedge None Single Double L R L R Longedge None Single Double L R L R Staple Position
Product Description

If an attempt is made to print the 51st sheet when 50 sheets or more are to be stapled, the warning Cant Staple appears and paper is ejected from the compile tray. Even if the page size has no problem with stapling, paper may be ejected without stapling depending on the combination of Orientation, Binding, Staple and Staple position. The warning (Staple Align) occurs. See the table below. In accordance with the combination of designation, the print image is rotated relative to the paper. See the table below.
A4/A5/B5/LT/ HLT/EXE Rotation Rotation, Front Rear Rotation, (warning) Rotation, (warning) Rotation Rotation, Front Rear Rotation, Double Double Rotation Rotation, Rear Rotation, Front Rotation, (warning) Rotation, (warning) Rotation Rotation, Rear Rotation, Front Rotation, Double Rotation, Double
A3/B4/LG/ GLG/B Rotation Rotation, Rear Rotation, Front Rotation, Double Rotation, Double Rotation Rotation, Rear Rotation, Front Rotation, (warning) Rotation, (warning) Rotation Front Rotation, Rear Double Double Rotation Front Rotation, Rear Rotation, (warning) Rotation, (warning)

For ejecting paper to any tray other than finisher: The same as EPL-N4000. For ejecting paper to the finisher: Without staple designation: Printing is performed 180 degrees reversely. With staple designation: The print image is rotated corresponding to the staple position. When Reverse is designated by the driver: The print image is reversed compared with the usual staple designation time. As a result, the opposite position is stapled. When Stacker becomes full, paper is ejected to Face-down in the same direction as EPL-N4000.

NOTE: Rotation: The print image is rotated 180 degrees. Front: Stapling at the front of the compile tray Double: Double-stapling at the center of the compile tray Rear: Stapling at the rear of the compile tray
Rev.B
40
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Even if the combination of staple designation is changed during one job, the first designated staple position is valid, and the 180 degrees rotation is performed throughout the copy. For stapling paper other than A4 and A3 at Rear (at the rear of the compile tray), the staple is run parallel to the paper edge. The staple angle is as follows:
Support Menu/HDD Format Press the setting execution switch, and HDD initialization (formatting) will start. Reboot (warm-boot) after initialization is finished. After rebooting, the support mode is cleared (returning to usual mode). Support Menu/Adobe PS 3 kit HDD Init Press the setting execution switch, and PS area initialization (no formatting) will start. Reboot (warm-boot) after initialization is finished. After rebooting, the support mode is cleared (returning to usual mode).

Front (at the front of the compile tray)
: 45 degrees
Double (double-stapling at the center of the compile tray) : parallel Rear (at the rear of the compile tray) A4, A3:: 45 degrees : parallel
MAINTENANCE MENU
If Reset is performed while compile tray holds paper, the job is terminated and paper is ejected without stapling. Stapling may not be carried out if Print overrun error occurs.
SETUP MENU Setup Menu/Auto Eject Page Whether or not paper is ejected when a receive time-out occurs. On: Paper is ejected with a time-out. Stapling is performed with staple designation. Off:Paper is not ejected with a time-out.
Engine Status Sheet (Maintenance Menu) The engine status sheet is printed. Before performing this operation, be sure to place the printer in a normal mode (a mode other than maintenance mode), check that there is no service call related to the engine, turn on the power again, and enter the maintenance mode. The maintenance menu functions from Engine Status Sheet to Error Log Clear are not open to users. Total Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 Execute this operation to clear Total Counts on the engine board to zero. Total Counts are printed on the engine status sheet.
SUPPORT MENU This setting menu appears only when the printer is brought into Support mode by special operation at power-on, and can then be selected. By turning off the power and restarting after that, the Support Menu is deleted from the menu and the printer is brought into usual mode. The support mode is a mode for users to set and execute the items which are not usually set (HDD initialization etc.).
NOTE: Page Count in the Setup Menu is counted on the controller side (main board), and the value of the Page Count is different from Total Counts on the engine board.
Rev.B
41
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Fuser Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the fuser is replaced. Fuser Counter indicated on the engine status sheet becomes zero and Fuser Change increments by one.

FU Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when around Face-up indicated on the engine status sheet become zero. MB Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the multibin is replaced. Multibin indicated on the engine status sheet become zero. Fin Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the finisher is replaced. Finisher indicated on the engine status sheet become zero. Staple Count Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the stapler is replaced. Stapler indicated on the engine status sheet become zero. Error Log Clear (Maintenance Menu)*2 The error log list stored to be indicated on the engine status sheet is cleared. The latest 20 error logs are memorized.
NOTE: The value of Fuser Counter may become negative due to Total Counter Clear.
LC1 to 5 Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the LC1 to 5 feed rollers are replaced. LC1 to 5 Counters indicated on the engine status sheet become zero and LC1 to 5 FR Changes increment by one. MP Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the feed roller of the MP tray is replaced. MP Counter indicated on the engine status sheet become zero and MP FR Change increment by one. TR Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the transfer roller is replaced. TR Counter on the engine status sheet become zero and TR Change increments by one. DM Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when the duplex unit is replaced. Duplex indicated on the engine status sheet become zero. FD Counter Clear (Maintenance Menu)*1*2 The serviceman executes this operation only once when around Face-down is replaced. Face-down indicated on the engine status sheet become zero.

NOTE: * 1: Before executing these operations, the engine must be stopped completely. *2: After execution, warm boot takes place and the printer returns to the normal state.
Rev.B
42
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.3 User setting items not included in the setting menu

The following is a list of user setting items not included in the setting menu. They are not cleared by Selc Type Init of the Setup Menu on the panel. Table 1-43. User setting items not included in the setting menu
Setting item Printer name command MFG of Device ID MDL of Device ID DES of Device ID CID of Device ID Name of Mailbin1 Name of Mailbin2 Name of Mailbin3 Name of Mailbin4 Name of Mailbin5 Name of Mailbin6 Name of Mailbin7 Name of Mailbin8 Name of Mailbin9 Setting 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 32-byte character string 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data 24-bytes of data Initial value EPL-N4000+ (TBD) (undefined) (undefined) (undefined) (undefined) Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Null Setting method EJL, Printer Name EJL EJL EJL EJL EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB EJL, MIB
Name of Mailbin10 24-bytes of data
Rev.B
43
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.4 Special Operation Functions

H e re lists the spe cia l op eration fu nctions su ppo rted b y th is printer. T he functio ns a re no t op en to users e xcept for the hexade cim al d um p functio n, initializa tion of p anel se tting s a nd S u pport M od e..
C A U T IO N
Turn on the power, pressing On-line switch, Continue switch and Menu switch. Total Counts, LC1 to LC5 Counter, etc., which are controlled by the mechanical controller side, will not be initialized. The total number of copies to be indicated on the status sheet will be initialized as it is counted by the controller side.
C A U T IO N
Please handle carefully the information written in this section. Special operation mentioned here are not opened to the users except for hexadecimal dump, initialization of panel settings and Support Mode, since the service man with professional knowledge should perform these operation.
Hexadecimal Damp Received data is converted to hexadecimal ASCII, then it is output. It is effective for all interfaces.
Initialization of the Panel Settings This function returns all the panel setting to the factory setting. (common environment, I/F environment). After that, the printer performs warm boot and returns to the normal state.
Operation Turn on the power, pressing Continue switch.

Operation Turn on the power, pressing Form Feed switch. Cancel Perform Warm boot by pressing Reset(Continue) switch, or turn the power off and on again.
C A U T IO N

Support Mode Printer goes to the support menu by this operation.
All the values which can be set by the user, are initialized. Values which can be changed by the printing operation or maintenance operation, are not initialized. (For example, the number of printed sheet, toner left quantity, paper volume and all items on the engine status sheet)
Operation Turn on the power, pressing Value Select switch.
Initialization of EEPROM All values, which are stored in the EEPROM at the controller side, are initialized and returned back to the factory setting. After this initialization, the printer perform warm boot and goes back to the normal state.
Forced erasing of Flash ROM Module This operation erases the content of the flash ROM module, which is connected to A slot DIMM ROM Module on the main board.
Operation: Turn on the power, pressing Alt switch, Item switch, Value switch and Enter switch. Erasing starts after Erasing DIMM A is indicated. After that, the printer performs warm boot and returns to the normal state.
Rev.B
44
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Program ROM Up Date This function updates program DIMM, which is connected to the program socket on the main board.
Printing of error sheet

Operation Turn the power on, pressing On-Line switch, Alt switch and Value switch.
Operation: Press Enter twice after CPU reset at the occurence of a service call error.
Copy of ROM Module This function copies the content of ROM module inserted to B socket on the main board to the flash ROM module inserted to A socket. Also, if ROM module is not inserted to B socket, the printer copies the content of ROM module, which is inserted to code ROM socket.
Operation: Turn the power on, pressing On-Line switch, Alt switch and Enter switch. By pressing Enter switch at the point that LCD displays DIMM COPY MODE, the printer copies after erasing Flash ROM. After that, the printer performs warm boot and returns to the normal condition.
Maintenance Mode
Operation: Power on the printer while pressing On-Line switch, Form Feed switch and Continue switch.
See Maintenance Mode on page -46 for more details.
CPU reset at service call occurence
Operation Press Alt, Menu, Item, Value and Enter switches when a service call error has occured.
Rev.B
45
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode

Maintenance menu is added to the setting menu, then, the printer performs warm boot and enable to execute the maintenance menu. (See Table 1-28, Printer Setting, on page 27)

MP Counter Clear This function is performed when the Feed Roller of the tray is exchanged. MP counter on the status sheet becomes 0 and +1 is added when the roller is exchanged. TR Counter Clear This function is performed when the transfer roller is exchanged. TR counter on the engine status sheet becomes 0 and +1 is added when the transfer roller is changed. DM Counter Clear This function is performed when the duples unit is exchanged. Duples on the engine status sheet becomes 0. FD Counter Clear This function is performed when the parts around the Face Down are exchanged. Face Down on the engine status sheet becomes 0. FU Counter Clear This function is performed when the parts around the Face UP are exchanged. Face UP on the engine status sheet becomes 0. MB Counter Clear This function is performed when the mailbox(multibin) is exchanged. Mailbox on the engine status sheet becomes 0. Finisher Counter Clear This function is performed when the Finisher is exchanged. Finisher on the engine status sheet becomes 0. Stapler Counter Clear This function is performed when the Stapler is exchanged. Stapler on the engine status sheet becomes 0. Error Log Clear This function clears error log list, which is memorized in order to indicated on the engine status sheet. Error log memorizes 20 newest information.
1.4.5.1 Operation
Turn the printers power on while pressing On-Line switch, Form Feed and Continue switches.
C A U T IO N
In the maintenance mode, since the service require error is ignored, make sure that there is no error signs when you need to print out something, such as Engine status sheet.
Total Counter Clear This function is executed when Total Counter needs to be 0. Since Page Counts indicated on the status sheet is different from Total Counts on the engine board, it does not become 0. Note that the value of Fuser Counter may become negative due to Total Counter Clear. Fuser Counter This function is performed when the toner is exchanged. Fuser Counter on the engine status sheet becomes 0 and +1 is added when the fuser is exchanged. LC15 Counter Clear This function is performed when each Feed Roller Set in cassettes 1 to 5 is exchanged. Each corresponding LC(1 to 5) counter on the engine status sheet becomes 0 and+1 is added when the feed roller set is changed.

Rev.B
46
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.6 Engine Status Sheet

Engine status sheet prints out the data at the engine side. Usage condition of each following mechanism is indicated.

Fuser change This indicates how many times the Fuser is exchanged and +1 is added when performing Fuser Counter Clear at the Maintenance Menu.
Total Counter This shows the printed volume after the total counter clear is performed at the maintenance menu. This total counter is different from the total print volume on the status sheet. Jam Counter Frequency of the Jam occurrence. ET Cartridge
Input

LC n Counter This indicates how many papers are fed from LC n(n= tray number) after LCn Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu. This value is red from the engine side. MP Counter This indicates how many papers are fed from MP(tray) after MP Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu. This value is red from the engine side. LC n FR Change This indicates how many times Feed Roll of LC n is exchanged. +1 is added when LC n Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu. MP FR Change This indicates how many times the Feed Roll of MP is exchanged. +1 is added when MP Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu.

Toner Toner left quantity is indicated by 1% degree. OPC Counter OPC is counted by minutes which is read from engine side by drum rotation time. Cartridge Change This indicates how many times ET Cartridge is exchanged. +1 is added when the new cartridge is detected.
Fuser
Fuser Counter This shows the printed volume after the Fuser Counter Clear is performed.The condition to count is same as the total print volume. Since the actual value is the difference between the previous value before the fuser is exchanged and the current total count value, minus(-) value may be indicated by the total counter clear.
Transfer Roller

TR Counter This indicates how many paper passed through the transfer roller after TR Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu. This value is red from the engine side. TR Change This indicates how many times the Transfer Roller is exchanged. +1 is added when TR Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu.
Rev.B
47
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Output

Duplex This indicates how many papers passed through the Duplex unit after DM Counter Clear is performed at the maintenance menu. This value is counted at the controller side. Face-Down This indicates how many papers are ejected to Face-Down after FD Counter Clear is performed at maintenance menu. This value is counted at the controller side. Face-up This indicates how many papers are ejected to Face-Up after FU Counter Clear is performed at maintenance menu. This value is counted at the controller side. Multi This indicates how many papers are ejected to Mialbox(Multibin) after MB Counter Clear is performed at maintenance menu. This value is counted at the controller side. Finisher This indicates how many papers are ejected to Finisher after performing Fin Counter Clear at the maintenance menu. This value is counted at the controller side. Staple This indicates how many times staple after performing Staple Counter Clear at the maintenance menu.
...30% The printing volume whose printing occupancy(duty) exceeds 3% and the value is counted at the controller side. Over 30% The printing volume whose printing occupancy(duty) exceeds 3% and the value is counted at the controller side. A3/B The printing volume of A3 or B size and the value is counted at the controller side. A4/LT The printing volume of A4 or LT size and the value is counted at the controller side. A5/HLT The printing volume of A5 or HLT size and the value is counted at the controller side. B4/LGL The printing volume of B4 or LGL size and the value is counted at the controller side. B5/EXE The printing volume of B5 or EXE size and the value is counted at the controller side. Envelope The printing volume of MON, C10, DL or C5 size and the value is counted at the controller side. Post Card The printing volume of the post card and the value is counted at the controller side.
Print
...3% The printing volume whose printing occupancy is less than 3% and the value is counted at the controller side.
Rev.B
48
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
Custom The printing volume of no-fixed size and the value is counted at the controller side. Since the frequently used paper size or troublesome paper size have priority, GLG, GLT and F4 are not counted. It is the printing value by the requested size.

Name of Information Total Counter Jam Counter Place Mechanical Controller Controller Controller Range ~ 100000 times ~ 100000 times 0~100% Count Condition When printing When Jam occurs When printing Clear Condition Panel EEPROM Initialization When the new cartridge is detected. EEPROM Initialization None EEPROM Initialization Panel, EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization Panel Panel, EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization Panel EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization

MCU It is mechanical controller version of the printer body and the value is red from the engine side. Duplex It is mechanical controller version of the Duplex and the value is red from the engine side. Mailbox It is mechanical controller version of the Mailbox and the value is red from the engine side. Finisher It is mechanical controller version of the Finisher and the value is red from the engine side. Error Log The newest 20 information of control panel message about the generated errors, EJL status codes and total printing volume are recorded. The indication order starts with the newest occurence. The errors which will be recorded are Service Req. Error( which happened after On-Line is indicated), Jam, Abnormal cassette size, Toner cartridge ID error, Toner cartridge R/W error and MCU Version Up. If the error is recorded in the same number of the printing value, the new error will not be recorded.
Toner
OPC Counter Carriage Change Fuser Counter
ET Cartridge Controller 0~100 times
When printing When the new cartridge is detected. When printing
Controller
Fuser Change LC n Counter MP Counter
Controller Mechanical Controller Controller
0~10 times
Panel When feeding
~ 150000 sheets 0~10 times 0~10 times
When feeding
LC n FR Change MP FR Change TR Counter TR Change Duplex
Controller Controller Mechanical Controller Controller Controller
Panel Panel Printer
0~10 times ~ 150000 sheets
Panel When passing normal paper
Rev.B
49
Name of Information Face Down Face-Up Mailbox (Multibin) Finisher Staple ...3% ...30% Over 30% A3/B A4/LT A5/HLT B4/LGL B5/EXE Envelope Post Card Place Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Controller Range ~ 150000 sheets ~ 150000 sheets ~ 150000 sheets ~ 150000 sheets ~ 150000 times ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages ~ 150000 pages Count Condition When ejecting paper When ejecting paper When ejecting paper When ejecting paper When executing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing When Printing Clear Condition EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization EEPROM Initialization
CHAPTER 1
Product Description

Name of Information Custom Error Code n Place Controller Controller Range ~ 150000 pages --Count Condition When printing When error happens When error happens Clear Condition EEPROM Initialization Panel, EEPROM Initialization Panel, EEPROM Initialization
Error Page n
Controller
---
Note) Panel under the Clear Condition in the Table is in the setting item of the maintenance menu. The count value at the Duplex is performed, distinguishing long edge and short edge, but the value is combined both(long and short edges) at the engine status sheet.
Rev.B
50
CHAPTER 1
Product Description
1.4.7 Initialization Process

In this printer, following initialization process are performed automatically or manually. The printer goes to the On-line(ready) condition after initialization process is completed successfully.
Cold Start Processing This initialization is activated by turning the power on, and perform various checking first.
Reset Process This initialization process performs only the active interface, the data received by other interface is stored. This initialization is used when the copies are canceled or the printing invalid data is halted.
Processing: Initialization of engine Initialization of ROM, EEPROM, DRAM Initialization and checking of peripheral devices Initialization of memory

Operation: Press Continue switch, pressing the Alt switch. Processing: Cancel the print request Cancel the buffered data from the current port before the initialization. Canceling the error
Warm boot processing This initialization process stops printing for all interfaces and perform initialization until right after the power is turned on, but does not perform various checks.

Operation While pressing ALT switch, press Continue switch until Reset All is indicated at LCD. Processing: Initialization of Memory Clear the received buffer of all interfaces
Rev.B
51

OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Chapter 2
2.1 Mechanical Drive

2.1.1 Overview
Mechanical Drive is a term that is used to describe both the rotation of the printer motors and the action of the gear clusters and clutches that are used to transmit and control motor rotation to the various components throughout the printer. The primary purpose of Mechanical Drive within the printer base is to drive a sheet of paper out of a selected paper tray, through the printer and into an output tray. The ROS Motor is not considered part of Mechanical Drive. The Main Drive Motor turns the Main Drive Assembly gears. The Drive Assembly provides drive to the Feed Clutches, the Registration Clutch, the Fuser, the Drum and BTR, and the Exit Clutches. Lift Up Motors supply drive to each paper tray; raising the Bottom Plate of each tray so the paper stack contacts the Feed Rolls. The Offset Motor provides drive to the Offset Rolls.
2.1.2 Mechanical Drive Component

EPL-N4000/N4000+ is made up of 4 major components. 1. Offset Motor A +24VDC motor. 2. Main Drive Assembly Contains the +24VDC Main Drive Motor and the Main Drive Assembly Gears. The Main Motor is attached to the Main Drive Assembly. 3. Lift Up Motor 1 A +24VDC motor. 4. Lift Up Motor 2 A +24VDC motor.
sr1314x
Sr1345x
Figure 2-1. Mechanical Drive
Figure 2-2. Mechanical Drive Major Component
Rev.B
53
Chapter 2
2.1.2.1 Offset Motor

In Offset, printed papers are ejected into either rear side or front side. Offset Motor generates the driving power for Offset page eject. Also, printed papers can be divided by the number of distribution. MCU switches the Offset Motor on and off, during the offset paper eject. 1. When MCU(Machine Control Unit) turns on Offset Motor, the Offset Motor drives the Bracket toward the front of the printer, pushing the Offset Roll along with it. 2. When the Bracket reaches the end of travel, MCU stops Offset Motor. 3. The MCU again switches on the Offset Motor, which drives the Bracket toward the rear of the printer, carrying the Offset Roll along with it. 4. When the Bracket reaches the end of travel, MCU stops Offset Motor and eject the paper, leaving the Offset Bracket in that position.
The Main Drive Assembly gears transmit the motor drive to the Fuser Drive Gear. When the Left Upper Cover is closed, the DTS Link Rod pushes the Fuser Drive Assembly into contact with the Fuser Drive Gear, which transmits drive to the Fuser Rolls. The Main Drive Assembly gears transmit the motor drive to the Drum. When the Main Motor is on, the Drum rotates. When the Left Upper Cover is closed, the BTR gear contacts the Drum gear, which in turn rotates the BTR. The Main Drive Assembly gears transmit the motor drive to the Exit Drive, which transmits drive to the two Inverter Clutches. At a specific point in each print cycle, the MCU PWB actuates either the CW Clutch or the CCW Clutch which drive the Exit Roll and the Offset Roll.
2.1.2.2 Main Motor and Main Drive Assembly

The MCU PWB switches the Main Motor on and off. The rotation of the Main Motor creates mechanical drive. The Main Drive Assembly gears transmit the motor drive to Feed Clutch 1, Feed Clutch 2, and the MSI Feed Clutch. At paper feed, the MCU PWB actuates a Feed Clutch, which in turn transmits drive to the appropriate Feed Rolls. The Main Drive Assembly gears transmit the motor drive to the Registration Clutch. At a specific point in each print cycle, the MCU PWB actuates the Registration Clutch, which in turn transmits drive to the Registration Roll.
Rev.B
54
Chapter 2
2.1.2.3 Lift Up Motor 1 and Lift Up Motor 2

When a Paper Tray is installed in the printer, the MCU PWB switches on the Lift Up Motor. Each tray has a square metal shaft running along one side of the tray. Attached to the shaft is an L shaped metal tongue. 1. When the tray is inserted into the paper feeder, a pin at the end of the shaft engages the Lift Up Motor gear. 2. When the MCU detects that the tray is inserted, MCU PWB switches on the Lift Up Motor. 3. Then, the motor rotates the square shaft and the square shaft shifts the attached metal tongue, which in turn raises the tray Bottom Plate which raises the paper stack. 4. As the paper stack raises, it pushes up on the No Paper Actuator, which in turn switches the No Paper Sensor.
2.1.2.4 Motor Control

The MCU PWB provides power for and controls the operation of the Main Motor, the Lift Up Motors, and the Offset Motor. All motors are +24VDC motors. The Main Motor is a stepper motor. The MCU signals step the Main Motor through a 360 rotation. The MCU PWB provides both forward and reverse control of the Offset Motor.
sr1315x
Figure 2-4. Motor Control
Figure 2-3. Lift Up Mechanism Motor Control
Rev.B
55
Chapter 2
2.2 Paper Path

The Paper Path is the physical route that a sheet of paper takes through the printer during a print cycle; from leaving the Paper Cassette to arriving at the Output Tray. Rubber rollers and other components drive the paper along the Paper Path. During simplex printing the Offset Roll drives the paper into the Output tray. During duplex printing, the Offset Roll rotation is reversed and the Offset and Exit Roll drives the paper into the Duplex Module.
Sr1316x
Figure 2-5. Print Cycle A sheet of paper may be fed from either Tray 1, Tray 2, or from the MSI. At the start of a print cycle the Nudger Roll moves a sheet of paper into the Feed Roll. The Feed Roll moves a single sheet of paper out of Tray 1/Tray 2/MSI and toward the Registration Roll. The Retard Rolls in Tray 1 and Tray 2 or the Retard Pad in the MSI made sure that only one sheet of paper is fed. If the paper was fed from Tray 2 or the MSI the Take Away Roll drives the paper to the Registration Roll. The Registration Roll aligns the lead edge of the paper with the lead edge of the image on the drum. The Registration Roll then drives the paper into the Drum/BTR area. The rotation of the Drum and BTR drive the paper into the Fuser where the Heat and Pressure Rolls drive the paper into the Offset/Pinch Roll.
Figure 2-6. Paper Path
Rev.B
56
Chapter 2
2.2.1 Paper Path Components

The Paper Path is made up of a number of major components and subcomponents.

MSI Paper Size Sensor monitors the size of paper in the Tray. MSI Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Feed Roll and Nudger Roll. Nudger Roll drives the top sheet of paper into the Feed Roll. Feed Roll drives the top sheet of paper out of the MSI tray. Retard Pad prevents multiple sheet feed. Take Away Roll and Pinch Roll continue to drive the sheet of paper out of the MSI Tray and toward the Registration Roll.

Tray Assembly Holds plain paper of various sizes. Slides into the Feeder. Feeder 1 and Feeder 2 Framework that is attached under the printer. A Tray Assembly slides into the Feeder. The Feeder includes a number of paper feed components.

Lift Up Motor raises the Tray Bottom Plate so the paper contacts the Feed Roll. No Paper Sensor monitors the level of paper in the Tray. Paper Size Sensor monitors the size of paper in the Tray. Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Feed Roll and Nudger Roll. Nudger Roll drives the top sheet of paper into the Feed Roll. Feed Roll drives the top sheet of paper out of the Tray. Retard Roll prevents multiple sheet feed. Take Away Roll and Pinch Roll continue to drive the sheet of paper out of Tray 2 and toward the Registration Roll.
Registration Roll and Pinch Roll The Registration Roll is a driven roll. The Pinch Roll is an idler that rides on the surface of the Registration Roll. The Registration Roll and Pinch Roll register a sheet of paper with the toner image on the surface of the Drum. Registration Sensor Monitors the movement of paper at the Registration Roll. Drum and BTR (Bias Transfer Roll) In addition to xerographic functions, the Drum and BTR drive the paper out of the Xerographic area and into the Fuser area. Heat Roll and Pressure Roll In addition to fusing functions, the Heat Roll and Pressure Roll drive the sheet of paper out of the Fuser and into the Offset Unit. Fuser Exit Sensor Monitors the movement of paper out of the Fuser. Offset and Exit Unit The assembly located above the Fuser. The Offset Unit drives paper to either the standard Face Down Output Tray, to the optional Face Up Output Tray, or to the Duplex Module. The Offset Unit includes a number of components.

MSI Feeder Paper feed assembly that is attached to the outside of the printer. A small quantity or paper, or the optional Envelope Feeder, fit on the MSI Feeder fold-out tray. The MSI Feeder includes a number of paper feed components.
MSI No Paper Sensor monitors the level of paper in the MSI tray.
Rev.B
57
Chapter 2

Inverter CW and CCW Clutches transmit Main Motor drive, forward and reverse, to the Offset Rolls. Offset Roll and Pinch Roll drive the sheet of paper either forward into the Output Tray or in reverse to the Exit Roll and on to the Duplex Module. Exit Gate Solenoid controls the Exit Gate to toggle the paper path between the Output Tray or the Exit Roll and on to the Face Up Tray or Duplex Module. Offset Motor and Offset Bracket moves the Offset Roll back and forth so paper delivered to the Output Tray will stack offset. Exit Roll and Pinch Roll drive the sheet of paper to either the Face Up Output Tray or to the Duplex Module.
Figure 2-7. Paper Path Component
Rev.B
58
Chapter 2
2.2.2 Paper Feed, Transport and Paper Eject Drive

The Main Drive Assembly provides the mechanical drive for the majority of the Paper Path components. The Offset Motor provides the mechanical drive for the Offset Rolls.
2.2.3 Mechanical drive for paper fed from the MSI

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for MSI feed(Multi Sheet Inserter). The Drive Assembly transmits drive to the MSI Feed Clutch. The MSI Feed Roll and Nudger Roll are attached to the MSI Clutch. At paper feed, the MCU switches on the MSI Feed Clutch. The MSI Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Feed Roll, which rotates and begins feeding a single sheet of paper out of the MSI Tray. Tray 1 Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Take Away Roll. The Take Away Roll and Pinch Roll drive the sheet of paper into the Registration Roll.
Figure 2-8. Paper Feed, Transport and Paper Eject Drive When the Left Upper Cover is closed, DTS Link Rod is pushed and Bracket Assembly conveys the motive power of Main Drive Assembly to the Fuser Assembly.
Figure 2-9. MSI Drive Mechanism
Rev.B
59
Chapter 2
2.2.4 Mechanical Drive for Paper Fed from Tray1

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for MSI feed. The Drive Assembly transmits drive to the MSI Feed Clutch. The MSI Feed Roll and Nudger Roll are attached to the MSI Clutch. At paper feed, the MCU switches on the MSI Feed Clutch. The MSI Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Feed Roll, which rotates and begins feeding a single sheet of paper out of the MSI Tray. Tray 1 Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Take Away Roll. The Take Away Roll and Pinch Roll drive the sheet of paper into the Registration Roll.
2.2.5 Mechanical Drive for Paper Fed from Tray2

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for Tray 2 feed. The Drive Assembly transmits drive to Tray 2 Feed Clutch. Tray 2 Feed Roll and Nudger Roll are attached to the Feed Clutch. At paper feed, the MCU switches on the Tray 2 Feed Clutch. The Feed Clutch transmits drive to the Feed Roll, which rotates and begins feeding a single sheet of paper out of Tray 2.
Figure 2-10. Tray 1 Drive Mechanism Figure 2-11. Tray 2 Drive Mechanism
Rev.B
60
Chapter 2
2.2.6 Mechanical Drive for Registration

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for the Registration Roll. The Main Drive Assembly transmits drive to the Registration Clutch. At a specific time in the print cycle the MCU switches on the Registration Clutch. The Registration Clutch transmits drive to the Registration Roll, which rotates and drives the sheet of paper into the Drum/BTR area.
2.2.7 Mechanical Drive for the Drum and BTR

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for the Drum and BTR. The Main Drive Assembly transmits drive to the Drum. A shutter covers and protects the Drum surface. When the Left Cover is closed, a mechanical link opens the Shutter. When the Left Cover is open, the link closes the Shutter. A gear attached to the end of the Drum transmits drive to the BTR. Since the BTR is attached to the Left Cover Assembly, the BTR is driven only when the Left Cover is closed.
Figure 2-13. Drum/BTR Drive Mechanism
Figure 2-12. Registration Roll Drive Mechanism
Rev.B
61
Chapter 2
2.2.8 Mechanical Drive for the Fuser

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for the Fuser Assembly. The Main Drive Assembly transmits drive to the Fuser Drive Assembly and on to the Fuser Heat Roll Gear. A gear at the end of the Heat Roll drives the Pressure Roll. The Heat and Pressure Rolls rotates continuously while the Main Motor is on and the Left Front Cover is closed. Part of the same mechanical link that opens and closes the Drum Shutter when the Left Cover is closed, pushes the Fuser Drive Gear against the Fuser Heat Roll intermediate gear, which transmits drive to the Fuser Heat Roll.
2.2.9 Mechanical Drive for Exit Drive

The Main Motor provides mechanical drive for the Offset and Exit Rolls. The Main Drive Assembly transmits drive to the Inverter CW Clutch and to the Inverter CCW Clutch. At a specific point in the print cycle the MCU switches on the CW Clutch. The CW Clutch transmits forward drive to the Offset Roll, which drives the sheet of paper into the Face Down Output Tray. If the printer is running in Duplex Mode, at a specific point in the forward drive, the MCU switches off the CW Clutch and switches on the CCW Clutch. The CCW Clutch transmits reverse drive to the Offset Roll and to the Exit Roll, which drive the paper back across the top of the Fuser Assembly and into the Duplex Module.
Figure 2-14. Fuser Drive Mechanism
Figure 2-15. Exit Drive Mechanism
Rev.B
62
Chapter 2
2.2.10 Mechanical Drive for Offset

The Offset Motor provides mechanical drive for the Offset Rolls. The Offset Motor transmits drive to the Offset Bracket. If the printer is running in Offset mode, the MCU switches on the Offset Motor. The Motor drives the Offset Bracket toward the front of the printer. The Bracket pushes the Offset Roll along with it. The Offset Rolls drive one sheet of paper into the Face Down Output Tray. The MCU switches the Offset Motor on again, and the Motor drives the Offset Bracket back to the rear of the printer, taking the Offset Roll with it. The Offset Rolls drive the next sheet of paper, slightly offset from the last sheet, into the Face Down Output Tray.
2.2.11 Paper Path Component Control

The logic on the MCU PWB controls the Paper Path components. Sensors along the paper path monitor the movement of each sheet of paper and send information back to the MCU. The MCU provides the timing and data processing necessary to actuate clutches and solenoids, switch motors on and off, and to identify paper jams. The MCU PWB provides the +24VDC drive signals for the Main Motor, the Offset Motor, and the assortment of clutches and solenoids within the printer. The MCU PWB also provides +5VDC to the paper path sensors.
sr1319xa
Figure 2-17. Paper Path Component Control Figure 2-16. Offset Drive Mechanism
Rev.B
63
Chapter 2
2.3 ROS (Raster Output Scanner)

The ROS (Raster Output Scanner) is the mechanism that carries out Step 2. Expose of the print cycle.
2.3.1 ROS Components

The ROS Assembly is made up of one major component housing a number of sub-components.
W A R N IN G

sr1320
Figure 2-18. Exposure A semiconductor within the ROS Assembly generates a beam of laser light. Image data received from the print controller modulates this beam, turning it on and off according to image information that is received from the host computer. Through the use of a series of rotating and stationary mirrors within the ROS, the beam sweeps the negative charged drum surface. Whenever the print controller sends a command to print a black pixel, the laser switches on long enough to shine onto the drum at a single pixel point. That point on the drum is now discharged.
The ROS generates a laser beam. The laser beam is a very powerful and narrow beam of light that produces extreme heat at its focal point. The laser beam in this printer is invisible. Although you cannot see the beam, it can still cause severe eye injury. Direct eye exposure to the laser beam may cause blindness. Never place a mirror or a reflective tool or object in the laser beam path. Never run the printer with the covers removed or the ROS interlocks bypassed.
2.3.1.1 Housed inside the ROS Assembly
Laser Diode Assembly (LD) A semiconductor Laser Diode that generates a 5 milliwatt class 3B laser beam. Circuity on the LD PWB maintains the laser output power at a constant level. The LD PWB is electrically connected to the MCU PWB and to the C262 Main Board. The MCU provides power and control circuitry. C262 Main Board provides the video data input from the host computer Corrective Lenses and Angled Mirror Four lenses, two small, one medium, and one wide, and an angled mirror focus the laser beam and direct it toward the Polygon Mirror. Polygon Mirror A twelve-side rotating mirror that is attached to the Scanner Motor Assembly. The movement of the rotating Polygon Mirror reflects the laser beam in a sweeping motion, from side to side across and through the wide lens.

sr1321x
Figure 2-19. Laser Beam
Rev.B
64
Chapter 2

Scanner Motor Assembly The Scanner Motor Assembly is attached to the Scanner Motor Assembly PWB. The +24VDC Motor rotates at a constant speed. The Scanner Motor Assembly is electrically connected to the MCU. Wide Lens A lens that focuses the beam coming from the Polygon Mirror and directs it onto the Angled Mirror. Drum Mirror Angled so it reflects the laser beam coming from the Angled Mirror, down onto the surface of the drum. SOS PWB (Start Of Scan Sensor) The SOS Sensor is in-line with the laser beam sweep. The laser beam strikes the SOS Sensor at the beginning of each sweep to let the printer control circuity know that a new scan has started. The SOS PWB is electrically connected to the MCU PWB.
The Drum Mirror is aligned at an angle so the mirror reflects the sweeping beam down onto the surface of the Drum. The combination of the rapid sweeping of the laser beam across the surface of the charged Drum and the rapid switching on and off of the laser beam creates, on the Drum, an invisible electrical image that corresponds to the screen image that was sent from the host computer. Located at one corner of the ROS, near the end of the Angled Mirror is the Start of Scan Sensor (SOS) Mirror. The Start of Scan Sensor is located at the opposite corner of the ROS Assembly. Each sweep of the laser beam begins by striking the SOS Mirror, reflecting the beam into the SOS Lens, which focuses the beam onto the SOS Sensor. The SOS Sensor is electrically connected to the MCU PWB. When the laser beam strikes the Sensor, the Sensor notifies the MCU that a new scan has started.
2.3.2 ROS Operation

The MCU PWB supplies +5VDC to drive the Laser Diode semiconductor. The semiconductor uses the +5VDC to generate a 5 milliwatt beam of invisible laser light. As is characteristic of semiconductor devices, the Laser Diode can switch states very rapidly. A switching circuit on the Laser Diode PWB switches the Laser Diode on and off according to image data sent from the C262 main board. Two lenses, an angled mirror, and another two lenses focus the laser beam onto the rotating Polygon Mirror. The Polygon Mirror has twelve mirrored sides and rotates at approximately 15,000 RPM. The Polygon Mirror reflects the laser beam back through the two lenses and onto the Angled Mirror. The movement of the Polygon Mirror reflects the laser beam in a sweeping motion, from side to side, across the Angled Mirror; with one complete sweep for each mirrored side. The Angled Mirror reflects the laser beam onto the Drum Mirror.
sr1323x
Figure 2-20. Structure of ROS
Rev.B
65
Chapter 2
2.3.2.1 Image Resolution

This printer has an print image resolution of 600 dpi (dots per inch). Print image resolution is determined by the number of dots (or pixels) per inch of beam sweep and the number of sweeps per inch of paper travel.
2.3.2.2 ROS Control

The Laser Diode PWB controls laser power monitoring and adjustment. The MCU PWB controls the rest of the ROS Assembly functions. C262 main board processes video data sent from a host computer. The ESS PWB then passes that data on to C262 main board which controls the flow of video data to the Laser Diode PWB. C262 main board switches the laser diode on and off according to the image data being sent from C262 main board. When the data signals for a black pixel, C262 main board rapidly switches the Laser Diode on and off. The MCU PWB provides the +5VDC needed to drive the Laser Diode. The CRU Interlock Switch cuts +5VDC to the Laser Diode when the EP Cartridge is not in place in the printer. The MCU PWB provides the +24VDC needed to run the ROS Motor. The MCU PWB also provides the signal (/RMOT ON) that switches the ROS Motor on and off. To reduce ROS Motor wear, the MCU switches off the ROS Motor after 15 minutes of printer inactivity. The MCU PWB provides the +5VDC (signal 5V) needed by the SOS Sensor. The Sensor returns information about the start of each scan to the MCU through the /SOS signal.
sr1324x
Figure 2-21. Image Resolution
Cotroller
sr1325xa
Figure 2-22. ROS Control
Rev.B
66
Chapter 2
ROS Safeguards There are two safety interlocks built into the CRU cavity. A molded tab located at the end of the EP Cartridge actuates Interlock SW1 which, along with SW2 (the Left Cover Interlock), controls +24VDC out of the MCU PWB. When the Left Cover is open or the EP Cartridge is removed, SW1 and SW2 cut +24VDC out of the MCU PWB. An electrical jack at the end of the EP Cartridge completes the +5VDC circuit for CRU Interlock switches SW1 and SW2. When the EP Cartridge is removed, +5VDC to the Laser Diode is cut. Never run the printer with the covers open or removed, the Main Interlock Switch actuated, and the CRU Interlock Switches bypassed. Direct eye exposure to the laser beam may cause serious eye injury or blindness.
W A R N IN G
Rev.B
67
Chapter 2
2.4 Print Process

Print process step of this printer is to form the toner image on the drum surface, transfer this image to the paper, and fuse the transferred toner image to the paper.

Charge Places a uniform negative electrostatic charge on the surface of the drum. Expose A data modulated laser beam scans the drum surface, converting select negative points to positive points. Develop Attaches dry toner to the positive points of the drum. Transfer Transfers the dry toner image from the drum to a piece of paper. Detack Strips the piece of paper, along with the dry toner image on the paper surface, from the drum. Clean Cleans any residual toner from the surface of the drum and prepares the drum for the next print cycle. Discharge Cleans any residual electrical charge from the surface of the drum and prepares the drum for the next print cycle. Figure 2-23. Print Process The figure below shows major component related to the printer process.
Figure 2-24. Major Component
Rev.B
68
Chapter 2
2.4.1 Charge
The Bias Charge Roll (BCR) places a uniform negative electrostatic charge on the surface of the drum. The drum surface is made of a photoconductive material that holds an electrical charge as long as the drum remains in darkness. Light striking the drum discharges the surface charge. The BCR is a conductive roll that is positioned slightly above the surface of the drum. The HVPS supplies the BCR with two voltages; a negative DC charge voltage and an AC discharge voltage that is used for electrically cleaning the drum.
Sr1328xa
Figure 2-25. Charging
Rev.B
69
Chapter 2
2.4.2 Exposure
The Raster Output Scanner (ROS) generates a beam of laser light. Image data received from the print controller modulates this beam, turning it on and off according to image information that is received from the host computer and software. Through the use of a series of rotating and stationary mirrors within the ROS, the beam scans the negative charged drum surface. Whenever the print controller sends a command to print a black pixel, the laser switches on long enough to shine onto the drum at a single pixel point. That point is now discharged and slightly less negative than the surrounding negative charge. For the sake of simplicity, the less negative areas are considered "positive". This discharge/no discharge process creates an invisible, electrostatic image on the surface of the drum. This image is called a latent image.
Sr 1329x
The ROS also helps to clean and prepare the drum by scanning the surface of the drum at the beginning of each individual printer cycle. This action discharges an residual DC charge that may still remain on the Drum from the last print cycle.
Figure 2-26. Exposure
Rev.B
70
Chapter 2
2.4.3 Develop
The toner contained within the EP Cartridge has a slight magnetic property that causes it to adhere to the Magnetic Roll. The Charge Metering Blade (CM Blade) spreads the toner into a very thin layer on the Magnetic Roll. Friction between the Magnetic Roll and the CM Blade generates a small electrical charge that is transferred to the toner. The surface of the Magnetic Roll is made up of a thin sheet of conductive material. The HVPS supplies the Magnetic Roll with two voltages; a DC voltage and an AC voltage. The DC voltage is used to transfer toner from the Magnetic Roll to the surface of the drum. The AC voltage agitates the toner on the Magnetic Roll, making toner transfer easier.
Sr1330xa
The Magnetic Roll maintains a negative DC electrical potential. Negative charged areas of the drum have a lower electrical potential, or higher relative negative value than the Magnetic Roll. Discharged areas of the drum have a higher electrical potential, or lower relative negative value, than the Magnetic Roll. A discharged point on the surface of the drum now appears less negative, or positive, in relation to the negative charge on the Magnetic Roll. The toner adhering to the Magnet Roll is always in contact with the drum surface. When a less negative point on the drum (a discharged area) comes in contact with the more negative charged toner on the Magnet Roll, toner transfers from the Magnet Roll to that point on the drum. There is now a visible toner image on the drum surface. The image is called a developed image.
Figure 2-27. Developing
Rev.B
71
Chapter 2
2.4.4 Transfer
As the paper travels between the BTR and the drum surface, the Bias Transfer Roll (BTR) applies a positive charge to the back of the printing paper. This positive charge transfers the negative charged toner image from the drum surface to the top surface of the paper. The toner image is now on the paper and the paper is now stuck to the drum surface, due to the relative electrical differences between the negative electrical charge of the inner conductive layer of the drum and the positive electrical charge of the paper.
2.4.5 Detack
After the toner image transfers to the surface of the paper, the Detack Saw (a thin strip of metal that resembles a saw blade) applies a low voltage negative charge to the back of the paper to neutralize the positive voltage that was applied to it by the BTR. Once the positive voltage is neutralized, the paper strips releases easily from the drum surface and continues along the paper path to the Fuser.
Sr1332x Sr1331x
Figure 2-29. Detack Figure 2-28. Transfer
Rev.B
72
Chapter 2
2.4.6 Fusing
When a sheet of paper leaves the transfer area, static electricity holds the unfused toner image to the surface of the paper. After transfer, the paper moves to the Fuser where it passes between the Heat Roll and the Pressure Roll. The combination of heat and pressure melts the toner image and bonds it permanently to the paper. The fused sheet of paper is then transported to the output tray.
2.4.7 Clean
The Cleaning Blade removes any toner that remains on the drum after the transfer process. The toner that the Cleaning Blade removes is collected inside the sealed EP Cartridge. Toner that is reclaimed from the drum is not reused by the EP Cartridge.
C H E C K P O IN T
Toner collected by cleaning is collected as left toner and kept in the different room from that for the unused toner. Transfer efficiency is more than 90%. Transfer efficiency varies by the printing rate, humidity environment. Also, left toner is not reused.
Sr1334x Sr1339x
Figure 2-31. Cleaning
Figure 2-30. Fusing
Rev.B
73
Chapter 2
2.5 Print Sequence
From Registration Roll to BTR/Drum
Paper Feeding from Tray1
Figure 2-32. Paper Feeding from Tray1
Figure 2-33. From Registration Roll to BTR/Drum
Rev.B
74
Chapter 2
Fusing and Paper Eject
Paper Feed from Tray2
Figure 2-34. Fusing and Paper Eject
Figure 2-35. Paper Feeding from Tray 2
Rev.B
75
Chapter 2
2.6 Operating Principles for Power Supply Circuit

2.6.1 Power Supply Circuit
The power supplies in this printer provide the voltages that the printer requires to operate. The various printer functions require 110VAC, +5VDC, +24VDC, and several high voltage DC and AC values that are used by xerographics. The printer AC power cord plugs into a grounded AC wall outlet. The cord carries AC line voltage to the Noise Filter PWB. The Noise Filter smooths the AC voltage and sends it to the Main Power Switch. Switching on the Main Power Switch applies AC voltage to the AC Driver PWB and to the Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) PWB. The AC Driver PWB is the interface between printer control (MCU) and the Fuser. Fuser sensors connected to the AC Driver PWB send Fuser status information to the Driver PWB, which the PWB routes to the MCU PWB. The MCU processes the information and sends commands back to the AC Driver PWB to tell the AC Driver whether or not to switch on the Fuser Heat Rods. The Low Voltage Power Supply PWB, or LVPS, converts the 110VAC to regulated +24VDC and +5VDC voltages. The LVPS sends these voltages to the MCU PWB. The MCU uses the voltages for internal processing and for printer component operation. The MCU also sends +24VDC to the High Voltage Power Supply PWB. The High Voltage Power Supply PWB, or HVPS, converts the +24VDC received from the MCU PWB to the high voltages that are required by the xerographic system of the printer. The HVPS produces
the Charge (CR), Transfer (TR), Developer Bias (DB), and Detack (DTS) voltages, and sends them on to the EP Cartridge and to the Bias Transfer Roll (BTR).
sr1301xa
Figure 2-36. Power Supply Circuit
2.6.2 Power Supply Components

This printer is made up of five main components and a number of subcomponents.
Noise Filter PWB Smooths and removes any fluctuation or hum from the AC line voltage. Main Power Switch: Used to switch AC voltage on and off (switches the printer on and off). AC Driver PWB Receives smoothed AC voltage from the Noise Filter. The AC Driver PWB receives Fuser temperature information from Fuser sensors and passes that information on to the MCU for processing. The MCU PWB commands the AC Driver to switch on or switch off AC voltage to the Fuser Heat Rods.
Rev.B
76
Chapter 2
Low Voltage Power Supply (LVPS) Takes filtered AC voltage and converts it into regulated +24VDC and +5VDC.
If either SW1 is open (the EP Cartridge removed) or SW2 is open (the Left Front Cover is open) the MCU PWB cuts all +24VDC output from the MCU PWB.
W A R N IN G
The LVPS contains overcurrent protection circuits. If an excessive current begins to flow through any of the components supplied by the LVPS, the LVPS immediately shuts down all low voltage output. To reset the LVPS after an overcurrent shutdown; switch off the printer, wait a few minutes, then switch on the printer. The LVPS contains open circuit protection circuits. If the LVPS detects that a circuit is open for longer than one minute, the LVPS slowly decreases the LVPS output until the output is zero. To reset the LVPS after an open circuit shutdown; switch off the printer, wait a few minutes, then switch on the printer. The LVPS contains a low +24VDC output protection circuit. If the LVPS detects the +24VDC output dropping below +15VDC, the LVPS slowly decreases the +24VDC LVPS output until the output is zero. LVPS Fan: A +24VDC fan that cools the LVPS PWB.
Even though the interlock switches cut the +24VDC output from the MCU PWB, +24VDC output from the LVPS is still present throughout the printer as well as 110VAC line voltage along the AC paths in the printer.
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS) Takes the +24VDC received from the MCU PWB and converts it to the high voltages that are required by the printer xerographic components.
The HVPS contains overcurrent protection circuits. If an excessive current begins to flow through any of the xerographic components, the HVPS immediately shuts down all high voltage output. To reset the HVPS after an overcurrent shutdown; switch off the printer, wait a few minutes, then switch on the printer.
Machine Control Unit (MCU PWB) Takes the +24VDC and +5VDC generated by the LVPS and distributes them to the various components through out the printer, including +24VDC to the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS).
Interlock Switches SW1 and SW2: Used as a safety measure. The main interlock circuit for this printer is actually two separated switches wired in series with the MCU PWB. When the EP Cartridge is in place, Interlock Switch SW1 is closed. When the Left Front Cover is closed, Interlock Switch SW2 is closed. With both switches closed, the circuit is complete and the MCU PWB sends +24VDC to the HVPS and other printer components.
Rev.B
77
Chapter 2
Figure 2-37. Power Supply Component
Rev.B
78
Chapter 2
2.7 Printer Control

Printer Control is a broad term that is used to describe the printer resources that monitor and control the actions and operations of the printer; from warm-up, through the print cycle, to machine error detection. The center of printer control for the printer base engine is the Machine Control Unit PWB, or MCU PWB. The MCU contains an 8 bit microcomputer. The MCU contains ASICs (Application Specific Integrated Circuits) for image data transfer and communication control, ROM, RAM, a 16 bit integrated timer, programmable timing pattern control, a watch dog timer, serial communications interfaces, an A/D converter, a D/A converter, I/O ports, and a DMA controller. The MCU PWB provides the logic and information processing that is necessary for the printer to function. Every electrical component within the printer is connected either directly or indirectly to the MCU PWB. Sensors in the printer send printer status information to the MCU. The MCU processes that information and compares it to timing tables that are stored in onboard ROM. Acting on the results of the processing, the MCU sends commands to various printer components; switching on motors, switching off voltages, signaling statuses. Non-Volatile RAM on the MCU PWB stores adjustable operation parameters, such as Fuser temperature and laser strength, that are used as reference during printer operation.
Controller
Figure 2-38. Control Circuit Board
Rev.B
79
Chapter 2
Sr1310xa
Figure 2-39. Printer Control Component
Rev.B
80
Chapter 2
2.7.1 Printer Control Components

The Printer Control is make up of the MCU PWB and numerous connected components.

Control Panel Connected to C262 Main Board, the Control Panel displays status information send from the MCU PWB and C262 Main Board. AC Driver PWB Switches 110VAC to the two Fuser Heat Rods. Fuser temperature sensors are connected to the AC Drive PWB. The AC Drive PWB sends the temperature information to the MCU PWB. High Voltage Power Supply Converts +24VDC received from the MCU PWB to several high voltages that are required by printer xerographics. Toner Sensor Magnetic sensor that monitors the CRU toner level. CRU Drum usage information that is stored in the CRU. ROS The SOS (Start of Scan) Sensor, the ROS Motor, and the Laser Diode. Main Motor Provides most of the mechanical drive for the printer. Fuser Fan Cools the Fuser area. Feed Clutch Transmits Main Motor drive to the Tray 1 Feed Rolls. Registration Gate Clutch Transmits Main Motor drive to the Registration Rolls. Fuser Exit Sensor Monitors paper travel out of the Fuser.
2.7.1.1 Machine Control Unit PWB (MCU PWB)

Receives status and command information from sensors and from the C262 Main board. Controls most printer operations. The MCU PWB performs nine major functions:

Communicates with the Printer Controller (C262 Main Board). Maintains the system clock. Controls the printing process. Controls the ROS, the Fuser, and the drive assemblies. Distributes +5VDC and +24VDC to various printer components. Monitors printer status. Maintains a running print count. Maintains NVRAM settings. Controls printer options.
2.7.1.2 Components attached to or associated with the MCU PWB:

Low Voltage Power Supply Converts 110VAC to +5VDC and +24VDC. C262 Main Board Connected to the MCU PWB through the C262 Main Board. The interface between the print engine and the host computer. The ESS processes the raw video data sent by the host computer.
Rev.B
81
Chapter 2

Face Up Exit Sensor Monitors paper travel out of the Offset Unit. Full Stack Sensor Monitors the paper level in the Output Tray. Exit Gate Solenoid Toggles the Exit Gate. Inverter CW Clutch Transmits Main Motor drive, forward, to the Offset Rolls. Inverter CCW Clutch Transmits Main Motor drive, reverse, to the Offset Rolls. Offset Motor Provides mechanical drive for the Offset Unit. Duplex Module PWB Provides +5VDC, +24VDC, and command and status lines to the Duplex PWB option. Mailbox Provides +5VDC, +24VDC, and command and status lines to the Mailbox option. Finisher Provides +5VDC, +24VDC, and command and status lines to the Finisher option. Envelope Feeder Provides +5VDC, +24VDC, and command and status lines to the Envelope Feeder option. Cabinet Drive PWB Provides +5VDC, +24VDC, and command and status lines to the High Capacity Feeder option.
Size Sensor 1 Monitors the size of the paper that is loaded in Feeder 1. The Actuator Assembly located at the rear of the Paper Tray has series of cams that face the Size Sensor PWB. Pushing the Paper Guide against the paper stack slides the Actuator Assembly along a track. When the Tray is inserted into the Feeder, the cams on the Actuator press the switches on the Size Sensor PWB in a pattern that is unique to the position of the Paper Guide. The MCU PWB interprets this pattern as a specific paper size.
Figure 2-40. Size Sensor
Rev.B
82
Chapter 2

Registration Sensor Monitors paper travel out of the paper tray. No Paper Sensor 1 Monitors the paper level in Feeder 1. When the Lift Motor raise the Bottom Plate, the Plate raises the paper stack, the stack pushes the No Paper Actuator up and away from the No Paper Sensor. The Sensor sends a paper present signal to the MCU PWB. When the last sheet of paper is fed out of the Paper Tray, the No Paper Actuator drops through a cutout in the Bottom Plate. The Actuator then blocks the Sensor, and the Sensor sends a no paper signal to the MCU PWB.
Level 1 Sensor Monitors whether or not Tray 1 is installed. Installing the Tray pushes the Link Stopper out, which in turn lowers the Feed Roll and moves the Level 1 Sensor Actuator tab away from the Sensor window.
sr1495
Figure 2-42. Level 1 Sensor

Figure 2-41. No Paper Sensor
MSI Size Sensor Monitors the size of paper that is loaded in the MSI.
Rev.B
83
Chapter 2

MSI No Paper Sensor Monitors the paper level in the MSI. MSI Feed Clutch Transmits Main Motor drive to the MSI Feed Rolls. Lift Up Motor 1 Raises the paper tray in Feeder 1. The MCU PWB switches on the Lift Motor. The Motor rotates a square, metal shaft that is located inside the Paper Tray. The Shaft raises the Tongue, which in turn raises the Bottom Plate, and the paper stack, up to the Feed Rolls.

Take Away Roll Sensor Monitors the paper travel at the Take Away Roll. Interlock Switches 1 and 2 Monitors the CRU position Switch 1 and Left Cover Interlock Switch 2 on Feeder 1. Feed Clutch 2 Transmits Main Motor drive to the Tray 2 Feed Rolls. No Paper Sensor 2 Monitors the paper level in Feeder 2. Functions identical to No Paper Sensor 1. Level 2 Sensor Monitors whether or not Tray 2 is installed. Size Sensor 2 Monitors the size of the paper that is loaded in Feeder 2. Take Away Roll Sensor 2 Monitors the paper travel at the Take Away Roll 2. Lift Up Motor 2 Raises the paper tray in Feeder 2. Left Cover Interlock 2 Monitors the Left Cover Interlock Switch on Feeder 2.
Figure 2-43. Lift Up Motor 1
Rev.B
84
Chapter 2
2.7.1.3 Function of the MCU during printer control
Input from sensors Sensors tell the MCU what is going on within the printer and what is happening to the sheet of paper during a print cycle.
Processing input information Logic on the MCU compares the input information with the timing and reference values that are stored in ROM and NVRAM on the PWB.
Example below: Printer sensors send their status to the MCU PWB. The sensor status signals tell the MCU whether they are actuated or not actuated (on or off, high or low). If measured with a voltmeter, some sensor signals to the MCU would be +5VDC when on and 0VDC when off, while other sensors may be 0VDC when on and +5VDC when off. This high/low decision is determined when the printer is designed.
Example below: The Fuser Thermistor monitors the temperature of the Fuser Heat Roll and sends the current temperature value to the AC Drive PWB. The AC Drive PWB relays the temperature data to the MCU PWB. The MCU compares the current temperature with the set (or expected) temperature that is stored in NVRAM on the MCU PWB. If the current temperature is lower than the set temperature, the MCU sends a signal to the AC Drive PWB to switch on the Fuser Heat Rod until the current temperature reaches the set temperature.
sr1312
Figure 2-45. Processing Input Information

sr1311x
Figure 2-44. Input from Sensors
Rev.B
85
Chapter 2
Output to motors, solenoids, and other components. After comparing input values with timing and reference values, the MCU makes a decision on the current status of the printer, and responds appropriately. The MCU may switch on or off motors, solenoids, or other components. The MCU may also signal that an error occurred.
Example below: A the start of a print cycle, the MCU switches on the Main Drive Motor, and then the Feed Clutch. The MCU uses the Feed Clutch actuation as a timing marker. The Feed Rolls attached to the Feed Clutch drive a sheet of paper out of the paper tray and down the paper path. As the sheet of paper travels down the paper path it strikes the Registration Sensor. The Sensor sends a signal to the MCU PWB telling it that the paper has arrived. The MCU takes the elapsed time from when it actuated the Feed Clutch to the time it received the signal from the Registration Sensor and compares that time with the set time (or expected time) that is stored in ROM on the MCU PWB. If the time elapsed is within range, the print cycle continues. If the time elapsed is slower than the set time or if there was no signal from the Registration Sensor within the set time, the MCU interprets that as an error and sends an E1-1 Misfeed Jam status to the C262 Main Board.
sr1313
Figure 2-46. Output to Motor, Solenoid and Other Components
Rev.B
86
Chapter 2
2.7.2 Controller
The video data from the host computer is input to the controller circuit through either interface circuit or network board. C262 Main Board, which is the control circuit of this printer, generates video signal by converting the data based on the printing data from the host computer into the laster data. Laster data is sent to Laser Diode PWB as video signal. On the Laser Diode PWB, the emission light of Laser Diode is turned on or off by the video signal.
2.7.2.2 Specification on the Controller

The table below shows specifications on the controller. Table 2-1. Specification on the Controller
Type CPU ASIC Name (Location) R4700(IC1) E05B51 (IC2) E05B52 (IC23) E05B40 (IC26) E05B56 (IC32) Memory Mask ROM(IC10, 11) / Flash ROM (CN4,7) ROM DIMM DRAM EEPROM(IC405) EEPROM Host I/F Control Panel Expansion Parallel I/F Network Control Panel Unit ROM DRAM Type-B Hard Disk ROM Bus Clock CPU Video Dot DMA Video. Color Video. Monochrome I/O Function CPU controls the controller and is driven by 64 bit interior clock 133 MHz. Memory control and DMA control. Connecting E05B51 and E05B40 Control Panel, Host I/F control PGI, RIT, Engine I/F, Toner Counter IPL/Font
2.7.2.1 Functions of the Controller

Communication between the host computer and network Processing the Printing Data (Analyzing the command and generating video signal) Sending the video signal to ROS Assembly Monitoring the control panel Memory Management Data Buffer
Code, Local language and Expansion ROM SDRAM DIMM is used for both Standard and Expansion. 128kbit Serial type, Storing the setting values of the printer. 64Kbit, Parallel Type, (only pattern) IEEE-1284, B-type connector 10/100 BaseT LCD(20x1), 8 SWs, 6 LEDs Expansion by ROM DIMM Expansion by DIMM 2 slots, but only Ch1 P Bus (No DMA) Expansion for ROM and I/F 66.66660 MHz 67.1749 MHz 33.58748 MHz PCI (CPU Bus) E05B56 E05B52 via E05B40 + Type-B

Rev.B
87
Block diagram of C262 Main Board is shown below.
Chapter 2
E05B51
E05B56
Cooling Fan
Network I/F
E05B52
E05B40
Pattern only
Pattern o
ch201
Figure 2-47. Block Diagram of C262 Main Board
Rev.B
88

TROUBLESHOOTING
Chapter 3
Table 3-1. Service Flowchart
Block Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1
Troubleshooting
3.1 Troubleshooting
3.1.1 Service Flowchart
To use the Service Flowchart, start at Block 1 to identify the problem. After you have identified the problem, return to the Service Flowchart and proceed to Block 2 where you inspect and clean the printer (a through cleaning frequently solves many printer problems). You continue down the Flowchart, in this manner, always returning to the next block in the Service Flowchart after you have completed the tasks outlined in the current block. If you choose not to use the Service Flowchart, we recommend that you start at the appropriate Fault Isolation Procedure (FIP) Flowchart and proceed from there. In many cases, merely replacing the Print Cartridge with a new one could solve the printer problem.
Identify the problem. Vertify that the reported problem does exit. Check for any error codes or messages. Print three test prints. Make note of any print quality problems in the test prints. Make note of any mechanical or electrical abnormalities present. Make note of any unusual noise or smell coming from the printer.
Inspect and Clean the printer. Switch Off printer power. Disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Remove the EP Cartridge and shield it from strong light. Inspect the printer interior and remove any foreign matter such as paper clips, staples, pieces of paper, paper dust or toner. 5. Clean the printer interior with a lint-free cloth, dampered slightly with cold water. Do not use solvents or chemical cleaners to clean the printer interior. Do not use any type of oil or lubricant on printer parts. 6. Clean all rubber rollers with a lint-free cloth that is dampened slightly with cold water. Use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth to dry the rollers. 7. Clean the ROS window with a soft, dry, lint-free cloth. 8. Use canned air to clean the BTR. Do not touch the BTR with your fingers. Do not use a brush or damp cloth to clean the BTR. 9. While you are cleaning, inspect the interior of the printer for damaged wires, loose connections, toner leakage, and worn or damaged parts. 10.If the EP Cartridge appears excessively dirty or obviously damaged, replace it with a new one.
*
Rev.B
90
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.1.2 FIP Flowchart

Table 3-2. Service Flowchart(Cont.)
Block 3 Procedure Find the cause of the problem. Use the FIP Flowchart to find the cause of the problem. Use Diagnostic Mode to check printer components. Use the Wiring Diagrams to locate P/Js and test points. Take voltage readings at various test points. Correct the problem. Use the Disassembly and Assembly procedures(RRPs) to replace a part. Use the Parts List to locate a part inventory number. Final Checkout. Test the printer to be sure you corrected the initial problem and there are no additional problems present.
If you used the Service Flowchart, it should have directed you to this section. Follow the FIP Flowchart, located at the end of this section, to analyze your printer problem.
3.1.2.1 How to use the FIP Flowchart

1. If the LCD displays an error code; go to the ERROR CODE box. 2. If you have a printer operation problem; go to the PRINTER PERFORMANCE box. 3. If you have an print image problem; go to the IMAGE QUALITY box. 4. Follow the arrow leading from your problem box to the individual Primary FIP (Fault Isolation Procedure) that corresponds to your error code, printer operation problem, or print image problem. 5. Follow the instructions presented in the FIP. 6. Voltage and resistance values presented in the FIPs are an approximation. Actual readings may vary from the stated values. 7. Primary FIPs may direct you to a Secondary FIP. In the FIP Flowchart, the relationship between Primary and Secondary FIPs is represented with dotted lines.
Rev.B
91
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.1.2.2 How to follow a FIP

1. Each numbered step in a FIP instructs you to perform a certain action or procedure. 2. The action box may contain additional information and numbered substeps you must follow to perform the action. 3. The action is followed by a question. 4. If your response to the question is Yes, then follow the instructions for a Yes reply. 5. If your response to the question is No, then follow the instructions for a No reply. 6. FIPs often ask you to take voltage readings at certain test points within the printer. Refer to Appendix for signal information, if necessary. 7. FIPs often ask you to replace a printer component. Chapter 4 Disassembly and Assembly provides you detailed steps for removing and replacing all major parts of the printer.
3. Unless indicated otherwise, the instruction "switch ON main power" means for you to switch ON printer power and let the printer proceed through power-on diagnostics and warm-up until it is online and ready to print. 4. Conventions used to represent connectors: *P/J XX means a Plug and its corresponding Jack are connected. *PXX means a Plug is disconnected. (Unless this plug is soldered to a PWB). *JXX means a Jack is disconnected. (Unless this jack is soldered to a PWB). 5. When you are instructed to take a voltage reading between "P/J A B and P/J XY", place the red probe (+) of your meter on pin B of P/ J A, and place the black probe () of your meter on pin Y of P/J X. 6. When you are instructed to take voltage readings between "P/J X and P/J Y" (without specified pin numbers), check all voltage carrying pins. Refer to the Wiring Diagrams for signals and pin numbers. 7. When you are instructed to take a voltage reading, the black probe () is generally connected to a pin that is either RTN (Return) or SG (Signal Ground). You can substitute any RTN pin or test point in the printer, and you can use FG (Frame Ground) in place of any SG pin or test point. 8. Unless a FIP instructs you otherwise; before measuring voltages make sure the printer is switched ON, the Print Cartridge and the Paper Cassette are installed, and the Main Interlock Switch is actuated.
3.1.2.3 General Notes on Using FIPs

1. FIPs assume there is no malfunction in the printer controller (ESS). If you are unable to fix a problem using the FIPS, we recommend that you replace the printer controller. 2. FIPs frequently use new or "known good" components as troubleshooting tools. We recommend you carry a spare Print Cartridge (EP Cartridge), Fuser Assembly, MCU PWB, ESS PWB, and LVPS PWB.
Rev.B
92
9. All voltage values given in the FIPs are approximate values. Actual measured voltages may vary more than 25% from the values stated in the FIPs. The main purpose of most voltage readings taken in the FIPs is to determine whether or not a component is receiving the correct HIGH voltage value from the power supply and if gating (a voltage drop) occurs during component actuation. Gating signals may be nothing more than a pulse, resulting in a momentary drop in voltage that may be difficult or impossible to read on the average multimeter. 10. FIPs may instruct you to remove or replace a component. Refer to Section 10 Removal and Replacement Procedures for information on how to remove and reinstall a component. 11. When a FIP instructs you to replace a component, and that component is part of a larger assembly, you should replace the entire assembly.
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Start
Is the printer message indicated? No
Yes
Go to Troubleshooting by printer message
Abnormal operations which are not indicated by error codes. No
Yes
Go to Troubleshooing by Printer Performance (not indicated by error codes)
Any problems on Yes image quality? No
Go to Troubleshooting by Image Quality
Electrical Noise (Secondary FIPs)

Figure 3-1. FIP Flowchart
Rev.B
93
Chapter 3
Table 3-4. Printer Message
Message
Troubleshooting
3.2 Printer Message

The following lists the printer messages produced by this printer. Table 3-3. Printer Message
Message When printer is powered on Service Req effff ROM check RAM check MCU version Up? Self Test Reset All Reset Job Cancel Service call error Status Status Error Status Status Status Status Classification Finisher
Classification #533:Finisher Stacker Tray3 Lower Limit #541:Finisher Lower Safety #542:Finisher Stacker Lower Safety #581:Finisher Eject Clamp #582: Finisher Tamper Home #583: Finisher Stacker Offset #584: Finisher Stacker Tray ID #585: Finisher Stacker Upper Limit #586: Finisher Stacker Lower Limit #591: Finisher Stacker Head #592: Finisher Stacker Head Home #593: Finisher Stapler Front Corner #594: Finisher Stapler Front Straight #595: Finisher Stapler Rear Straight #596: Finisher Clamp Home
X Error #yyy X=LC1, LC2, LC3, LC4, LC5, DM, Multibin, Finisher, yyy=3 number xxxxxx LC1 LC2 LC3 LC4 LC5 DM Multibin Finisher #101:LC1 #102:LC2 #103:LC3 #104:LC4 #105:LC5 #207:DM comunication #507:Multibin communication #607 Finisher communication #511:Finisher Stacker Tray1 #512:Finisher Stacker Tray2 #513 Finisher Stacker Tray3 #521:Finisher Stacker Tray1 Upper Limit #522:Finisher Stacker Tray2 Upper Limit #523:Finisher Stacker Tray2 Upper Limit #531:Finisher Stacker Tray1 Lower Limit #532:Finisher Stacker Tray2 Lower Limit #yyy
Jam X X X X *1 (X=A, B, C, DM, D, MP, ENV, LC1, ..., LC5, E, F, G, H) Staple Supply Stapler Jam Fac-down Full Multibin 1 Full Multibin 2 Full Multibin 3 Full Multibin 4 Full Multibin 5 Full Multibin 6 Full Multibin 7 Full Multibin 8 Full Multibin 9 Full Multibin 710Full Finisher 1 Full Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error
Rev.B
94
Message Finisher 2 Full Finisher 3 Full Insert Imaging Crtg *2 Image Crtg ID Error Image Crtg R/W Error A Cover open DM Cover Open B Cover open C Cover open D Cover open E Cover open F Cover open G Cover open H Cover open Set MP Tray Set ENV Tray Finisher is removed Manual Feed ssss ttt Invalid Size LC1 Invalid Size LC2 Invalid Size LC3 Invalid Size LC4 Invalid Size LC5 Turn Paper LC1 Turn Papger LC2 Turn Papger LC3 Cant print Duplex Paper Out ssss ttt Toner Oui Paper Set ssss ttt Print Oversun Mem Overflow Classification Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Error Message Duplex Mem Overflow Invalid ROM B Write Error ROM P Reset to Save Writing ROM P Menu Locked (panel setting indication) Collate was disabled Image Optimum Check Paper Type Staple Limit Stapler Align Outbin Select Error Need Memory Format Feed (Indication during the test printing) Warming Up Toner Low Office Standby Ready
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting

Classification Error Error Error Status Status Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Warning Status Status Warning Status Status Status
Note*1): In case the paper jam occurs at several locations, indications appears at priority order; A, B, C, DM, D, MP, ENV, LC1,..., LC5, E, F, G, H. Maximum 4 locations are indicated. Note*2): If the toner cartridge is not installed A Cover Open also appears simultanenously Therefire, if several errors are detected, Insert Imaging Crtg and A Cover Open appears regardless of the Cover A condition.
Rev.B
95
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.2.1 Printer Message
Jam XXXX (Error)
MCU version up? (Error) (Not opened information)

Explanation This error appears when there is no recognizable character lines of EPSON at the Machine Controller side at turning the power on. Remedy Only Continue switch is effective to cancel the error.
Explanation Paper Jam occurred at the indicated part. If several parts are indicated, it means there are possibility of paper jam around that parts and does not mean the number of the jammed paper. Since the engine of this printer does not detect the paper size error, if the actually fed paper is longer or shorter than the appointed paper size at the printer size, the printer considers this condition as Paper Jam. Remedy If the paper jam occurs at the cover, open the indicated cover and remove the jammed paper. Then, close that cover. If paper jam occurs at the paper tray or ENV tray, remove the jammed paper and remove all papers in the paper tray or ENV tray once, and set them again. In case of cassette, pull out the indicated cassette, and remove the jammed paper and pull back the cassette.
1. Press Continue switch, when you version up only MCU(Machine Controller). After writing the fixed information of the engine, which is stored in the controller and recognizable character lines of EPSON into the Machine Controller, the printer warmboots automatically. The fixed information of the engine to write is the value, which is red from the Machine Controller and stored, when the printer is activated normally last time. 2. When both or either Controller or Machine Controller is replaced with new one, perform Initialization of EEPROM. (See Chapter1 Product Description)
Face-down Full (Error)
XErrorr yyy(Error)

Explanation This error appears when any troubles happen at the Paper Feed or Eject(Exit) devices. Remedy Turn off the printer once, and check the connection of the errored devices, and turn on the power again. If this does not recover the error, there is a possibility of malfunction.
Explanation This error occurs when the printer eject the paper to the Face Down but the Face Down is full. Also, if multi-bin becomes full when printing at multi-bin mode, paper will be ejected from multibin to Face Down. In this case, if the Face Down becoes full, this error appears. Remedy Take papers from Face Down and press Continue switch. Then, the printer will resume printing.
Rev.B
96
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Multibin 1 10 Full (Error)

Set ENV Tray (Error)
Explanation This error appears when the appointed Multi-bin becomes full. Remedy Remove the papers from that bin and press Continue switch. The printer will resume printing.

Explanation ENV is removed after turning the power on. Since the Cover is opened when the paper jam error occurs, the ENV might be left uninstalled. Or, non-ENV tray is installed. Remedy Install the ENV tray. The error is cancelled automatically.
Finisher 1 3 Full (Error)

This error appears when the appointed Finisher becomes full. Remedy Remove the papers from that Finisher and press Continue switch. The printer will resume printing.
Manual Feed ssss ttt (Error)
A-H Cover Open Explanation Indicated cover is open. Remedy Close that cover.
Explanation Although there is no setting menu on the panel, when the manual feed mode is selected by ESC/Page command, the printer indicates appointed paper size and feeding device before printing. Remedy Press Continue switch or On-line switch. If there are papers in the appointed tray, the printer feeds paper from there. If not, the printer feeds paper from the device which has most priority. If there is no paper in any devices, this error appears again. Paper size error does not occur even the fed paper is different from the appointed size(tttt).
Set MP Tray (Error)

Explanation This error appears when both paper tray and ENV tray are not installed when the printer is turned on. Remedy Install the tray, then error is canceled automatically.
Invalid Size LC1 5 (Error)

Explanation This error appears when the detected paper size is not supported or has undefined value. Remedy Pull out the cassette and set the correct paper size. As soon as the correct paper size is detected, the error is canceled automatically.
Rev.B
97
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Turn Paper LC1 3 (Error)

Explanation This error appears when A4, LT or B5 size paper is set portrait(short edge first). Remedy Reset the paper landscape(long edge first). The error is cancelled after closing the cassette.
Remedy Turn off the power and remove the corresponding optional device. In case of the options which are supported for this printer, perform the version up of the firmware.
Collate was disabled (Warning)
Can Print Duplex (Error)

Explanation This error appears when duplex printing is not available according to its rules. Remedy Pressing Continue switch will resume printing, but it will be one-side printing. If Auto Error Cancel is On on the device error, one-side printing will be resumed after a while. If the error cause is related to the setting of the paper feed device, duplex printing may resume after feeding setting is changed.
Explanation Due to the lack of memory, all necessary data becomes unable to be stored, as a result, appointed job printing can not be done. Or, copy number which exceeds the maximum bin number is requested. Only 1 copy from the fist page to the last page is printed.
Check Paper Type (Warning)
Paper Set ssss ttt (Error)
Explanation When paper feeding device and paper type are selected automatically, this error appears in case that there is no device, which support both that paper size and paper type, or paper size matches but not paper type. If paper type and paper size matches but there is no paper in the device, this becomes Paper Out error, and this error does not appear.
Explanation This error appears when the paper size in the selected paper feeding device does not match with the paper size which is about to be printed out.
Outbin Select Error (Warning)
Explanation According to the rules of paper exit, the appointed paper exit becomes invalid, and paper is ejected to the other paper exit.
Invalid Option (Error)
Explanation Finisher or HDD, which can not be used for this printer, is installed in the printer.
Rev.B
98
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.2.2 Service Req. Error

3.2.2.1 Engine Error
Following table lists service req. errors related to engine. Table 3-7. Engine Error
Engine Code U1-1 U1-3, U4-9 U3-5 U6-3, U6-4, U6-5 U3-1, U3-3, U3-4 -U4-1, U4-3 U4-2 U6-2 Error Code E0004 E0005 E0006 E0008 E0009 E0014 E0030 E0032 E0038 Explanation Abnormal Main Motor Abnormal Fan Abnormal Polygon Motor Abnormal EEPROM related to engine Abnormal laser Communication error related to engine Abnormal Fuser(Time Over) Abnormal Fuser(Over Heat) Engine Memory Error
3.2.2.2 Controller Error

The table below shows service req. errors related to the controller. Table 3-8. Controller Errors
Error Code ffff 0017 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 0088 0089 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0128-0254 0255 0256 0257 0258 0800 1002 Explanation CPU Error (Undefined interrupt) CPU Error (TLB modification exception) CPU Error (TLB-miss exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU Error (TLB-miss exception [Store]) CPU Error (Address Error Exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU Error (Address Error Exception [Store]) CPU Error (Bus error Exception [Fetch]) CPU Error ((Bus error Exception [Load/Fetch]) CPU Error (SYSCALL exception) CPU Error (Break exception) CPU Error (Reserved-command exception) CPU Error (Coprocessor-not-in-use exception) CPU Error (FPU exception) CPU Error (TLB exception) CPU Error (XLTB exception) CPU Error (Cache exception) CPU Error (Trap exception) CPU Error (FPU-error exception) CPU Error (Watch exception) CPU Error (Undefined Trap) CPU Error (NMI exception) CPU Error (Division by 0) CPU Error (Calculation overflow) CPU Error (Break) IPL Error (Controller defect) Standard RAM Error (less than standard capacity)
Rev.B
99
Table 3-9. Controller Error
Error Code ffff 1010 1020 1021 1022 1100 1101 1120 1121 1122 1123 1170 1180 1181 1185 1190 1200 1210 1400 1700 1999 2000 Verify Error RAM Error (Slot 0) RAM Error (Slot 1) RAM Error (Slot 2) RAM checksum error (bit 0 15) (font) RAM checksum error (bit 16 31) (program) RAM checksum error (bit 0 7) (program) RAM checksum error (bit 8 15) (program) RAM checksum error (bit 16 23) (program) ROM checksum error (bit 24 31) (program) Option FONT ROM Checksum Option FONT ROM Module A Checksum Error Option FONT ROM Module B Checksume Error No support ROM Module Cannot access Cartridge EEPROM Write Error EEPROM write counter overflow Engine Initialization fault Network Hardware Error Other hardware errors Software Error Explanation
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.2.3 Operation when Service Req. Error Occurs

When service req. errors happen, following functions are activated by pressing a particular switch.
Reset CPU when service req. errors happen. Printer recovers from the error without turning off and on the printer.

Operation Press Select Type(ALT), Menu, Item, Value switches and Enter switch.
Error Sheet Printing Service req. errors by CPU reset will be printed. It can be useful for analyzing errors.
Operation After resetting CPU, press Enter switch twice.
Rev.B
100
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.3 Printer Performance Problems(not indicated by Error Codes)

Before entering the error analysis, check following points. 1. Is the printer plugged into a recommended AC wall outlet? 2. Is the AC power provided at the wall outlet within recommended specifications? 3. Is the AC power cord connected to the printer?
14. Are consumables, such as the Print Cartridge (EP Cartridge), replaced at recommended intervals?
3.3.1 Inoperative Printer

Even when the main switch is turned on, LED on the Control Panel is not turned on, LCD is still blank and Fuser Fan does not rotate, and warm-up does not start. Table 3-10. Inoperative Printer
Step
4. Is the AC power cord in good condition; not frayed or broken? 5. Is the printer properly grounded through the AC wall outlet? 6. Is the printer located in an area where the temperature and humidity are moderate and stable? 7. Is the printer located in an area that is free of dust? 8. Is the printer located in an area away from water outlets, steamers, electric heaters, volatile gases, or open flames? 9. Is the printer shielded from the direct rays of the sun? 10. Does the printer have recommended space around all sides for proper ventilation? 11. Is the printer sitting on a level and stable surface? 12. Is recommended paper stock being used in the printer? 13. Does the customer use the printer as instructed in the User Manual?
Actions and Questions Suspect Components

The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. Fuser Assembly HVPS Assembly Main Drive Assembly ROS Assembly Wiring and connectors linking the components.
Yes
No
AC power cord inspection

Inspect the AC Power Cord Is the AC power cord plugged into the back of the printer, and is the other end plugged into an AC wall outlet?
Go to Step2
Insert AC power code into the printer and AC plug.
Rev.B
101
Table 3-11. Inoperative Printer
Chapter 3
Table 3-12. Inoperative Printer
Troubleshooting
Step
2
Actions and Questions

AC POWER CHECK
Check the voltage at the AC wall outlet. Is there approximately 110VAC (or 220VAC if the printer is the 220VAC model) at the AC wall outlet?
Yes
Go to step 3
No
Troublesho ot the AC power at the wall outlet
Step
6

AC POWER IN CHECK
Measure the voltage between J19-1 and J19-3 on the Noise Filter PWB. Is there 110VAC between J19-1 and J19-3?
Yes
Go to step 7
No
Replace the Noise Filter PWB (See Chapter 4)
ESS PWB CHECK

1. Switch off the Main Switch. 2. Remove the ESS PWB 3. Switch on the Main Switch. Do the Control Panel LEDs light up and does the printer go into warmup?
Replace the ESS PWB with a new one (See Chapter 4)
Go to step 4
AC POWER TO LVPS CHECK

Measure the voltage between J20-1 and J20-3 on the AC Drive PWB. Is there 110VAC between J20-1 and J20-3?
Replace the LVPS Assembly (See Chapter 4)
Replace the Main Power Switch. (See Chapter 4)
8 Go to step 5 Go to step 6
OPTION ISOLATION
Remove all options, such as the Duplex Unit or the High Capacity Feeder, from the base printer.
LVPS +5VDC CHECK

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Measure the voltage between J4007 and FG, and between J400-8 and FG on the MCU PWB. Is there +5VDC between J400-7 and FG, and is there +5VDC between J400-8 and FG.
LVPS +24VDC CHECK

Measure the voltage between J400-5 and FG, and between J400-6 and FG on the MCU PWB. Is there +24VDC between J400-5 and FG, and is there +24VDC between J400-6 and FG?
Go step 8
Go to step 6
Do the Control Panel LEDs light up and does the printer go into warmup?
Replace the options one by one until the printer becomes inoperative again. Go to the Technical Manual of the problem option and troubleshoo t for possible electrical short.
Go to Suspect Components
Rev.B
102
Chapter 3
Table 3-14. Erratic Operation
Troubleshooting
3.3.2 Erratic Operation

The printer has a variety of intermittent problems,but generally does not complete a print cycle. The problems are generally not identified by displayed Error Codes. Table 3-13. Erratic Operation
Step
3

LVPS +24VDC UNDER LOAD CHECK
1. Generate 50 Grid Test Patterns. 2. While the printing is generating the Test Patterns, measure the voltage between J400-5 and FG on the MCU PWB. Does the +24VDC measured between J400-5 and FG remain relatively constant throughout the print run, and does not deviate more than a few volts during the print run?
Yes
Go to step 4
No
Replace the LVPS Assembly. (See Chapter 4)
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
Yes
No
TEST PRINT CHECK

Was the printer able to generate all of the Test Prints requested in steps 2 and 3?
Go to step 5
Printer options
1 Does the printer frequently fail to enter printer warm-up or is the Control Panel frequently inoperative? Go to Inoperative Printer Go to Step3 Go to Stpe2 5 Replace the LVPS Assembly
Replace the MCU PWB (See Chapter 4) Go to step 6
TEST PRINT CHECK

Does the printer stop and reset while making test prints?
LVPS +5VDC UNDER LOAD CHECK

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate 50 Grid Test Patterns. 3. While the printing is generating the Test Patterns, measure the voltage between J400-7 and FG on the MCU PWB. Does the +5VDC measured between J400-7 and FG remain relatively constant throughout the print run, and does not deviate more than a volt during the print run?
Go to FIP Electrical Noise Go to step 7
HOST MENT
SOFTWARE
REPLACE-
Problem solved
Reload the Host Drive Software or Host Application Software. Does the printer still exhibit erratic operation?
Rev.B
103
Table 3-15. Erratic Operation
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.3.3 Inoperative Control Panel

No
Problem solved
Step
7

HOST/PRINTER INTERFACE CABLE REPLACEMENT
Replace the interface cable connecting the host to the printer. Is the problem still present?
Yes
Go to step 8
The Control Panel LEDs, LCD, and /or Keypad do not function or do not function correctly. Table 3-16. Inoperative Control Panel
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. Wiring and connectors linking the components. ESS PWB
Yes
No
ESS PWB REPLACEMENT Replace the ESS PWB (See Chapter

4)
Problem solved
Does the printer still exhibit erratic operation?
CONTROL PANEL TEST

1. Remove the Control Panel from the Top Cover 2. Connect the Control Panel to P 410 on the MCU PWB.
Go to step 2
Go to step 3
C262 MAIN REPLACEMENT
CONTROLLER
Replace the C262 Main Controller Board.

Is the problem still present?
Replace the MCU PWB (See Chapter 4)
Problem solved
Rev.B
104
Table 3-17. Inoperative Control Panel
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.3.4 Inoperative Main Drive Assembly

No
Replace the LVPS Assembly.
Step
3

LVPS +5VDC CHECK Measure the voltage between J400-7 and FG, and between J4008 and FG on the MCU PWB. Is there +5VDC between J400-7 and FG, and is there +5VDC between J400-8 and FG.
Yes
Replace the Control Panel.
The Main Drive Assembly does not function. Table 3-18. Inoperative Main Drive Assembly
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. No recommendations
Yes
No
MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY TEST

Does the Main Motor run and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate normally?
Replace the MCU PWB
Go to step 2
MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY MANUAL TEST

Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Go to step 9
Go to step 3
EP CARTRIDGE BINDING CHECK

1. Remove the EP Cartridge. 2. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Replace the EP Cartridge with a new one.
Go to step 4
Rev.B
105
Table 3-19. Inoperative Main Drive Assembly
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Table 3-20. Inoperative Main Drive Assembly
Step
4

FUSER ASSEMBLY BINDING CHECK
1. Remove the Fuser Assembly. 2. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Yes
Replace the Fuser Assembly with a new one.
No
Go to step 5
Step
7

REGISTRATION CLUTCH BINDING CHECK
1. Remove the Registration Clutch. 2. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Yes
Replace the Registration Clutch with a new one.
No
Go to step 8
EXIT DRIVE ASSEMBLY BINDING CHECK

1. Lift the Exit Drive Assembly springloaded drive gear off of the Main Drive Assembly drive gear. 2. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Replace the Exit Drive Assembly.
Go to step 6
FEED CLUTCH BINDING CHECK

1. Remove the Feed Clutch. 2. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Replace the Feed Clutch with a new one.
Replace the Main Drive Assembly.
LVPS +24VDC CHECK

Measure the voltage between J400-5 and FG, and between J400-6 and FG on the MCU PWB. Is there +24VDC between J400-5 and FG, and is there +24VDC between J400-6 and FG?
Replace the Main Drive Assembly.
Replace the LVPS Assembly.
TRAY 2 DRIVE BINDING CHECK

1. Lift the Tray 2 spring-loaded drive gear off of the Main Drive Assembly drive gear. 2. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Motor. Can you rotate the Main Motor and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate easily and without binding?
Replace Tray 2 Drive Assembly.
Go to step 7
Rev.B
106
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.3.5 Inoperative Paper Feed Drive

Paper feed drive does not work. The problem is not identified by a displayed Error Code. Table 3-21. Inoperative Paper Feed Drive
Table 3-22. inoperative Paper Feed Drive
Step
4

MSI FEED CLUTCH TEST
Does the MSI Feed Clutch actuate and do the MSI Feed Rolls rotate?
Yes
Go to step 5
No
Replace the MSI Feed Clutch.
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. LVPS Assembly All paper path sensors Wiring and connectors linking the components.
Yes
No
5
TEST PRINT STRESS TEST

1. Generate 100 to 200 Grid Test Patterns. 2. Carefully observe the Main Drive Assembly and Feed Clutches as the test runs. Does the test suddenly stop; without any visible paper jam and without any Error Code displayed?
Go to step 6
Treat as an intermittent
NO PAPER SENSOR REPLACEMENT

1. Replace the No-Paper Sensor in the paper tray used in step 5 2. Generate 100 to 200 Grid Test Patterns. 3. Carefully observe the Main Drive Assembly and Feed Clutches as the test runs. Does the test suddenly stop; without any visible paper jam and without any Error Code displayed?
Replace the MCU PWB.
MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY TEST

1. Remove all of the paper trays from the printer. Does the Main Motor run and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate normally?
Go to step 2
Go to FIP Inoperative Main Drive Assembly
2 3
Is the problem with MSI feed?
Go to step 4 Go to step 5
Go to step 3 Replace the Tray 1 Feed Clutch.
TRAY 1 FEED CLUTCH TEST

While the Main Motor is running under 81, run Output Test 8-12 to actuate Tray 1 Feed Clutch. Does the Feed Clutch actuate and do the Feed Rolls rotate?
Rev.B
107
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.3.6 J1-2 is not displayed when the EP Cartridge is out of toner

The Control Panel LCD does not display the code J1-2 when the EP Cartridge is out of toner. Table 3-23. J1-2 is not displayed when the EP cartridge is out
3.3.7 Inoperative Interlock Switch

The Control Panel LCD either does not display an interlock open Error Code whenever a specific door or cover is open, or it does not display an interlock open Error Code when a specific door or cover is closed. Table 3-24. Inoperative Interlock Switch
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. LVPS Assembly ESS PWB Wiring and connectors linking the components.
Yes
No
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. Wiring and connectors linking the components. Printer cover or door
Yes
No
1 Replace the MCU PWB. Replace the Toner Sensor.
INTERLOCK SWITCH TEST

1. Manually actuate and deactuate the switch. Does the Control Panel LCD display a number that advances by one digit each time you actuate or deactuate the interlock switch?
TONER SENSOR TEST

1. Insert and remove a new EP Cartridge into the printer. Does the Control Panel LCD display L when the EP Cartridge is in place, and does the LCD display H when you remove the Cartridge?
Replace the MCU PWB.
Replace the Left Lower Cover Interlock Switch or the Left Cover Interlock Switch.
Rev.B
108
Chapter 3
Table 3-26. Inoperative Offset
Troubleshooting
3.3.8 Inoperative Offset

The Offset function does not work or does not work correctly. Table 3-25. Inoperative Offset
Step
3

OFFSET TEST
Does the Offset Roll shift away from the Exit Motor during 10-6 and toward the Motor during 10-7?
Yes
Go to step 4
No
Replace the Offset Unit Assembly.
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. Wiring and connectors linking the components. LVPS Assembly
Yes
No
4
MCU PWB REPLACEMENT

Replace the MCU PWB Does Offset work correctly?
Problem solved
MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY INSPECTION 1. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly Does the Main Motor run and do the gears of the Drive Assembly rotate normally?
Go to step 2
Go to FIP Inoperative Main Drive Assembly
EXIT DRIVE TEST 1. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. Does the Exit Motor run forward during 10-6 and reverse during 10-7?
Go to step 3
Replace the Exit Drive Assembly.
Rev.B
109
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.4 Image Quality FIPs

The FIP Flowchart or a Primary FIP should have directed you to this section. Before entering the Image Quality FIPs: 1. Is the printer plugged into a recommended AC wall outlet? 2. Is the AC power provided at the wall outlet within recommended specifications? 3. Is the AC power cord connected to the printer? 4. Is the AC power cord in good condition; not frayed or broken? 5. Is the printer properly grounded through the AC wall outlet? 6. Is the printer located in an area where the temperature and humidity are moderate and stable? 7. Is the printer located in an area that is free of dust? 8. Is the printer located in an area away from water outlets, steamers, electric heaters, volatile gases, or open flames? 9. Is the printer shielded from the direct rays of the sun? 10. Does the printer have recommended space around all sides for proper ventilation? 11. Is the printer sitting on a level and stable surface? 12. Is recommended paper stock being used in the printer? 13. Does the customer use the printer as instructed in the User Manual?
14. Have consumables, such as the EP Cartridge, been replaced at the recommended interval?
Rev.B
110
Chapter 3
Table 3-28. Light Prints
Troubleshooting
3.4.1 Light(Undertoned) Prints
Problem
The overall image density is too light. The image may also be unfused due to insufficient image density.
Step
3

IMAGE DEVELOPMENT INSPECTION
1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Is the image on the drum completely developed; with sharp, black, easily read areas?
Yes
Go to step 4
No
Replace the HVPS Assembly
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
ROS MCU
Assembly PWB
4
IMAGE TRANSFER INSPECTION

1. Carefully remove the Test Print generated in step 3. 2. Inspect the print. Was the toner image on the drum transferred completely to the paper. And are the grid lines black and unbroken?
Go to step 5
Step
1

PAPER INSPECTION
Is the paper wrinkled or dimpled?
Yes
Load fresh, dry paper. Problem solved
No
Go to step 2
Replace the BTR Assembly. If the problem persists, replace the HVPS Assembly
EP CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT
Install a new EP Cartridge (CRU). Is the image density normal?
Go to step 3
Rev.B
111
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Step
5

FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is the image normal before it enters the Fuser, but light when it exits the Fuser?
Yes
Replace the Fuser Assembly.
No
Rev.B
112
Chapter 3
Table 3-31. Blank White
Troubleshooting
3.4.2 Blank White
Problem
The entire print is blank.
Step
3

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Is the image on the drum completely developed; with sharp, black, easily read areas?
Yes
Go to step 4
No
Replace the HVPS Assembly.
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
MCU PWB CRU Connector and Contact Springs
Table 3-30. Blank White
Step
1

CONTROLLER OR HOST SOFTWARE ISOLATION
Generate a Grid Test Print.
Yes
Troublesho ot or replace the ESS PWB or reload the Host Driver Software Problem solved
No
Go to step 2

1. Carefully remove the Test Print generated in step 3. 2. Inspect the print. Was the toner image on the drum transferred completely to the paper. And are the grid lines black and unbroken?
Is the test print image normal?
Install a new EP Cartridge. Is there a normal image on the paper?
Go to step 3
Suspect an intermittent problem. Replace the MCU PWB and/or refer to the wiring diagrams Section 14 and check for a broken wire or loose connection between components in the Xerographic sections of the printer.
Replace the BTR Assembly. If the problem persists, replace the HVPS Assembly
Rev.B
113
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.4.3 Black Prints
Problem
Table 3-33. Black Prints
The entire print is black.
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
Step
3

Install a new EP Cartridge Is there a normal image on the paper?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 4
LVPS Assembly

1. Remove the Rear Cover 2. Generate a Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Is the image on the drum completely developed; with sharp, black, easily read areas and clear, white areas?
Replace the BTR Assembly.
Go to step 5
Step
1

ROS WINDOW INSPECTION
1. Remove the EP Cartridge. 2. Inspect the ROS Window for a sheet of paper that may have lodged in front of it and could be blocking the laser beam from reaching the Drum. Is the ROS Window free of paper?
Yes
Go to step 2
No
Remove the paper
CONTROLLER OR HOST SOFTWARE ISOLATION

Generate a Grid Test Print. Is the test print image normal?
Replace the ESS PWB or reload the Host Software
Go to step 3
MAIN CONTROLLER(C262MAIN) BOARD REPLACEMET

1. Replace the Main Controller Board(C262 Main). 2. Generate a Grid Test Print. Is the printed Test Pattern normal?
Problem solved
Go to step 6
Rev.B
114
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Step
6

MCU PWB REPLACEMENT
1. Replace the MCU PWB. 2. Generate a Grid Test Print. Is the printed Test Pattern normal?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 7
ROS REPLACEMENT
1. Replace the ROS Assembly. 2. Generate a Grid Test Print.
Problem solved
Is the printed Test Pattern normal?
Refer to the wiring diagrams Section 14 and check for a broken wire or loose connection between components in the Xerographic sections of the printer.
Rev.B
115
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.4.4 Vertical Band Deletions

There are areas of the image that are extremely light or missing entirely. These missing areas form wide bands that run vertically along the page, in the direction of paper travel. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
No recommendations
Table 3-36. Vertical Band Deletions
Problem
Step
3

EP CARTRIDGE REPLACEMENT Install a new EP Cartridge (CRU).
Are the vertical band deletions gone?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 4
SUSPECT COMPONENTS

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Solid Black Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Before Transfer was the toner image on the drum normal and without vertical band deletions?
Go to step 5
Table 3-35. Vertical Band Deletions
Step
1

1. Remove the EP Cartridge. 2. Inspect the ROS Window for a scrap of paper or other contamination that may have lodged in front of it and could be blocking part of the laser beam from reach the Drum. Is the ROS Window free of paper or other contamination?
Yes
Go to step 2
No
Remove the paper scrap or clean the ROS window.
FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Solid Black Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is the image on the paper normal before it enters the Fuser, but there are vertical band deletions visible when it exits the Fuser?
Go to Suspect Components.
PAPER INSPECTION
Load fresh, dry paper.
Go to step 3
Rev.B
116
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.4.5 Horizontal Band Deletions

There are areas of the image that are extremely light or missing entirely. These missing areas form wide bands that run horizontally across the page, parallel with the direction of paper travel. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
CRU Connector and Contact Springs. MCU PWB. Fuser Assembly
Table 3-38. Horizontal Band Deletions
Problem
Step
3

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Solid Black Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Before Transfer was the toner image on the drum normal and without horizontal band deletions, but there are deletions on the paper after Transfer?
Yes
Go to step 4
No
Replace the BTR Assembly, then go to step 4
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
HVPS CHECK
Generate a Solid Black Test Print. Is the Test Print normal, with no horizontal band deletions?
Problem solved
Table 3-37. Horizontal Band Deletions
Replace the HVPS Assembly.
Step
1

PAPER INSPECTION
Yes
Replace with fresh, dry paper Problem solved
No
Go to step 2
Install a new EP Cartridge. Are the horizontal band deletions gone?
Go to step 3
Rev.B
117
Chapter 3
Table 3-40. Vertical Streaks
Troubleshooting
3.4.6 Vertical Streaks
There are black lines running vertically along the page.
Problem
Step
3

Install a new EP Cartridge (CRU). Are the vertical streaks gone?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 4
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
No recommendations

1. Remove the Rear Cover (RRP 1.3). 2. Generate a Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Before Transfer was the toner image on the drum normal and without vertical streaks, but there are vertical streaks on the paper after Transfer?
Go to step 5
Table 3-39. Vertical Streaks
Step
1

PAPER PATH INSPECTION
Inspect the paper path, between feed and exit, for contamination or obstructions. Is the paper path free of contamination or obstructions?
Yes
Go to step 2
No
Remove contamination and obstructions from the paper path. Clean ROS window
FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is the image on the paper normal before it enters the Fuser, but there are vertical streaks visible when it exits the Fuser?
Replace the ROS Assembly.

1. Remove the EP Cartridge. 2. Inspect the ROS Window for contamination that could be blocking part of the laser beam from reach the Drum. Is the ROS Window clean?
Go to step 3
Rev.B
118
Chapter 3
Table 3-42. Horizontal Streaks
Troubleshooting
3.4.7 Horizontal Streaks
There are black lines running horizontally across the page. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
MCU PWB CRU Connector and Contact Springs
Problem
Step
2

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Is the image on the drum completely white; without any horizontal streaks visible?
Yes
Go to step 3
No
Replace the ROS Assembly.
SUSPECT COMPONENTS

Inspect the Blank Test Print you generated in step 2. Are horizontal streaks visible on the paper after Transfer?
Go to step 4
Step
1

Install a new EP Cartridge. Are the horizontal streaks gone?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 2 4
FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is the image on the paper normal before it enters the Fuser, but there are horizontal streaks visible when it exits the Fuser?
Go to step 5
Rev.B
119
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Step
5

C262 MAIN CONTROLLER REPLACEMENT
Replace the C262 Main Board. Are the horizontal streaks gone?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 6
HVPS REPLACEMENT
Replace the HVPS Assembly. Are the horizontal streaks gone?
Problem solved
Rev.B
120
Chapter 3
Table 3-45. Spot Deletions
Troubleshooting
3.4.8 Spot Deletions
Problem
There are areas of the image that are extremely light or missing entirely. These missing areas form spots that are localized to small areas of the page. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
No recommendations
Step
3

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Black Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Before Transfer was the toner image on the drum normal and without spot deletions, but there are spot deletions on the paper after Transfer?
Yes
No
Go to step 4
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Black Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is the image on the paper normal before it enters the Fuser, but there are spot deletions visible when it exits the Fuser?
Table 3-44. Spot Deletions
Step
1

PAPER INSPECTION
Yes
Replace with fresh, dry paper Problem solved
No
Go to step 2
Replace the paper with fresh, dry paper. If problem continues, thoroughly clean the inside of the printer.
Install a new EP Cartridge. Are the spot deletions gone?
Go to step 3
Rev.B
121
Chapter 3
Table 3-47. Spots
Troubleshooting
3.4.9 Spots
Problem
There are spots of toner randomly scattered across the page. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
Step
2

INTERIOR INSPECTION AND CLEANING
1. With the EP Cartridge removed, inspect the interior of the printer for toner contamination. 2. Vacuum or wipe all interior surfaces, including Feed Rolls. 3. Generate 30 Blank Test Prints to clean out the printer. 4. Examine the last print out. Are the spots gone?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 3
SUSPECT COMPONENTS

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Is the paper clean before Transfer, but there are spots on the paper after Transfer?
No recommendations
Go to step 4
Table 3-46. Spots
Step
1

EP CARTRIDGE INSPECTION
1. Remove the EP Cartridge. 2. Inspect the outside of the Cartridge. 3. Open the Shutter and inspect the Drum. Is the EP Cartridge dirty and is it leaking toner?
Yes
Replace the EP Cartridge
No
Go to step 2
Rev.B
122
Table 3-48. Spots
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Step
4

FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is paper clean before it enters the Fuser, but there are spots on the paper when it exits the Fuser?
Yes
No
Clean or replace the Offset/Exit Assembly.
Rev.B
123
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.4.10 Residual Image or Ghosting

There are faint, ghost images appearing randomly on the page. The images may be either from a previous page or from the page currently being printed. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
MCU PWB
Table 3-50. Residual Image or Ghosting
Problem
Step
2

Generate a print run of 30 pages of varying images.
Yes
Go to step 3
No
Problem solved. Avoid printing numerous copies of the same image.
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
Do residual images still appear? 3
Install a new EP Cartridge. Are the ghost images gone?
Problem solved
Go to step 4
FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate ten Grid Test Prints and switch OFF printer power when the last print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Carefully remove the EP Cartridge and inspect the toner image on the print before it enters the Fuser and immediately after it exits the Fuser. Is the image on the paper normal before it enters the Fuser, but there are ghost images on the paper when it exits the Fuser?
Table 3-49. Residual Image or Ghosting
Step
1

CUSTOMER USAGE INSPECTION
Inspect the residual images. Was the customer printing numerous copies of the same image?
Yes
Go to step 2
No
Go to step 3
Rev.B
124
Chapter 3
Table 3-52. Background
Troubleshooting
3.4.11 Background
There is toner contamination on all or part of the page. The contamination appears as a very light gray dusting.
Problem
Step
2

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer.
Yes
Go to step 3
No
Replace the ROS Assembly
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
HVPS Assembly MCU PWB C262 Main Controller Board
Is the image on the drum completely clean; without any noticeable background toner?
3

1. Remove the Rear Cover. 2. Generate a Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Open the Drum Shutter. 5. Hand rotate (counter clockwise) the Main Drive Motor to advance the Drum far enough so you can see the developed image area on the Drum before it reached Transfer. Before Transfer was the drum clean and without noticeable background toner, but there was background visible on the paper after Transfer?
Go to step 4
Step
1

Install a new EP Cartridge. Is the background gone?
Yes
Problem solved
No
Go to step 2
Rev.B
125
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Step
4

FUSER INSPECTION
1. Generate another Blank Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is paper clean before it enters the Fuser, but there is background on the paper when it exits the Fuser?
Yes
No
Rev.B
126
Chapter 3
Table 3-55. Skewed Image
Troubleshooting
3.4.12 Skewed Image
The printed image is not parallel with the sides of the page.
SUSPECT COMPONENTS The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. ROS Assembly
Problem
Step
3

FEED, NUDGER, AND RETARD ROLL REPLACEMENT
Replace the Feed Roll, Nudger Roll, and Retard Roll for the Feeder having the skew problem. Is the image still skewed?
Yes
Go to step 4
No
Problem solved
REGISTRATION ROLL REPLACEMENT

Replace the Registration Roll. Is the image still skewed?
Replace the EP Cartridge
Problem solved
Table 3-54. Skewed Image
Step
1

PAPER FEED INSPECTION
Are the paper cassettes installed correctly, and is the paper correctly loaded into each cassette?
Yes
Go to step 2
No
Reload the paper and reinstall the cassettes. Remove obstructions or contamination from the paper path.

Inspect the paper path, between the feed tray and the exit tray, for contamination or obstructions. Is the paper path free of obstructions?
Go to step 3
Rev.B
127
Chapter 3
Table 3-57. Damaged Image
Troubleshooting
3.4.13 Damaged Prints
Problem
The printed page comes out of the printer either wrinkled, creased, or torn.
Step
3

PAPER FEED INSPECTION
Run a Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power halfway through the print cycle. Open the Left Upper Cover. Is the paper fed crooked?
Yes
Go to FIP Skewed Image
No
Go to step 4
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
No recommendations
PAPER PATH ROLLS INSPECTION

Inspect all of the rolls along the paper path, between the feed tray and the exit tray, for contamination, wear, or damage. Are the paper path rolls free of contamination, wear, or damage?
Go to step 5
Replace any damaged or worn rolls.
EP CARTRIDGE INSPECTION
1. Run a Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power before the sheet of paper reaches the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. Is the paper damaged before it reaches the Fuser?
Table 3-56. Damaged Prints
Step
1

PAPER INSPECTION
Inspect the paper that is loaded in the Feeder that is having the damage problem Is the paper in the Feeder already wrinkled, creased, or torn?
Yes
Replace with fresh, dry paper
No
Go to step 2 6
Replace the EP Cartridge and/or the BTR Assembly.
Go to step 6
FUSER INSPECTION
1. Run another Grid Test Print and switch OFF printer power when the print is halfway through the Fuser. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Examine the paper areas before the image enters the Fuser and after the image exits the Fuser. Is paper undamaged before it enters the Fuser, but there is damage visible as it exits the Fuser?
Clean or replace the Offset/Exit Assembly.

Inspect the paper path, between the feed tray and the exit tray, for paper scrap, obstructions, or broken printer components. Is the paper path clear and there are no broken components?
Go to step 3
Clear the paper path or replace the broken component.
Rev.B
128
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.4.14 Unfused Image or Image Easily Rubbed Off

The printed image is not fully fused to the paper. The image easily rubs off. The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears.
MCU PWB AC Drive PWB
Problem
3.4.15 Image not Registered Correctly

The printed image is not centered on the page or is bleeding off of the page.
Problem
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
SUSPECT COMPONENTS
ROS Assembly C262 Main Controller Board
Table 3-58. Unfused Image or Image Easily Rubbed Off
Step
1

PAPER INSPECTION
Yes
Replace with fresh, dry paper Replace the Fuser Assembly.
No
Go to step 2
IMAGE DENSITY INSPECTION

Run a Black Test Print. Is the Test Print a rich, dark gray?
Go to Image Quality FIP Light (Undertoned) Prints
Rev.B
129
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
3.5 Secondary FIPs

The FIP Flowchart or a Primary FIP should have directed you to this section. Before entering the Secondary FIPs: 1. Is the printer plugged into a recommended AC wall outlet? 2. Is the AC power provided at the wall outlet within recommended specifications? 3. Is the AC power cord connected to the printer? 4. Is the AC power cord in good condition; not frayed or broken? 5. Is the printer properly grounded through the AC wall outlet? 6. Is the printer located in an area where the temperature and humidity are moderate and stable? 7. Is the printer located in an area that is free of dust? 8. Is the printer located in an area away from water outlets, steamers, electric heaters, volatile gases, or open flames? 9. Is the printer shielded from the direct rays of the sun? 10. Does the printer have recommended space around all sides for proper ventilation? 11. Is the printer sitting on a level and stable surface? 12. Is recommended paper stock being used in the printer? 13. Does the customer use the printer as instructed in the User Manual? 14. Are consumables, such as the EP Cartridge, replaced at recommended intervals?
Table 3-59. Electrical Noise Troubleshooting
Step

SUSPECT COMPONENTS
The following components are associated with this specific problem. One or more of these components may have failed partially or completely. If you cannot isolate the problem using this FIP, replace each component listed below, one at a time, until the problem disappears. Lift Up Motors Feed Clutches ROS Assembly. Offset Unit. ESS PWB.
Yes
No
EXTERNAL NOISE
1. Check if there is other electrical equipment, such as electrical generators, radio transmitters, or devices using electrical motors, within ten feet of the printer. 2. Shut off the other electrical equipment or relocate the printer at least twenty feet away from the other devices. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 2
Permanently relocate either the printer or the problem device.
Rev.B
130
Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Step
2

OPTION ISOLATION
If the printer has options installed, such as Duplex Unit or the High Capacity Feeder, remove each option one at a time, and see how the printer operations without that option installed.
Yes
Go to step 3
No
Go the Technical Manual for the problem option and troubleshoot for arcing solenoids, motor, or faulty PWBs or wiring. Repair the AC wall outlet
Step
6

HVPS REPLACEMENT
Replace the HVPS Assembly. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Yes
Go to step 7
No
Problem solved
AC DRIVER REPLACEMENT
Replace the AC Driver PWB. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 8
Problem solved
Does the Electrical Noise problem go away when you remove a specific option? 3
LVPS ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

Replace the LVPS Assembly. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 9
Problem solved
AC GROUND
Check the AC wall outlet. Is the AC wall outlet correctly wired and grounded? Steps 4 through 11 attempt to find a faulty printer component that may be generating electrical noise. If replacing a component does not solve the problem, reinstall the old component before moving on to the next step.
Go to step 4
FUSER ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

Replace the Fuser Assembly. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 10
Problem solved.
10
MCU PWB REPLACEMENT

Replace the MCU PWB. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 11
Problem solved.
Replace the EP Cartridge Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 5
Problem solved
11
MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

Replace the Main Drive Assembly. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
MAIN SWITCH REPLACEMENT

Replace the Main Power Switch. Is the Electrical Noise problem still present?
Go to step 6
Problem solved
Go to Suspect Component s
Problem solved.
Rev.B
131

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Chapter 4
4.1 Overview
This section contains the removal and replacement procedures for major parts and subsystems within the printer.
4.1.2 Tools
The table below shows the tools recommended for disassembling and assembling. Use only tools that meet these specification. Table 4-1. Tools
4.1.1 Cautions before starting

See the precautions below when disassembling or assembling EPLN4000.
- Driver
Name + Driver No.1 + Driver No.2 A pair of tweezers
Availability O O O O O
Code B743800100 B743800500 B743000100 B641000100 B740400100
W A R N IN G

Cutting Pliers
Switch off the printer power and disconnect the AC power cord from the wall outlet. Wait at least 30 minutes for the Fuser to cool before removing parts in the Fuser area. Since this printer weights approximately 50Kg, at least two people should carry it when moving it.
4.1.3 Notations in the Manual
Locations such as R or right, given in the manual assume you are facing the printer console panel.
C A U T IO N
Remove the EP Cartridge and cover it with a dark cloth or place it in a sealed container to protect it from exposure to light. Disconnect all interface cables from the back of the printer. Wear an electrostatic discharge wrist strap to protect sensitive printer PWBs from damage.
Figure 4-1. Notations
Rev.B
133
Chapter 4

Arrows in an illustration show direction of movement when removing a component. Slashes in a part name indicate that numerous components share the same heading and function. For example, "Gears In/Feed/Out" refers to Gear In, Gear Feed, and Gear Out.
Rev.B
134
Chapter 4
4.2 Procedures for Disassembling

This section describes procedures for disassembling EPL-N4000/N4000+. Unless specified, assembling can be done by reversing the disassembly procedures. If you need to disassemble the unit which are not written on the manual, refer to the exploded diagrams provided in Appendix.
A
MSI Feed Clutch
MSI Size Sensor Assembly
START
MSI Nudger Roll Assembly
MSI No-Paper Sensor Assembly
MSI Pad
MSI Feeder Assembly Tray 1& Tray 2 No Paper Sensor Tray 2 Take Away Sensor
MSI Nudger Roll
A
Left Lower Cover Interlock Switch Tray 1 & Tray 2 Level Sensor
MSI Feed Roll
Fuser Full Cover
MSI Friction Clutch

Feed, Nudger and Retard Roll L/H Lower Cover Assembly
ch402
Figure 4-3. Flow Chart 2

B
Top cover Assembly
BTR Assembly
(Transfer Roller)
Front Chute Assembly
Left Chute Assembly
Tray 1 Feeder Assembly
Rear Cover
Left Lower Cover Assembly
Left Lower Cover Pinch Roll Assembly ch401
Rev.B
135
Chapter 4
C
B
Offset /Exit Assembly
Offset Motor
Controller Board Unit
Control Panel
Exit Gate Solenoid
Low Voltage Power Supply Assembly

Exit Gate Solenoid
Face Up Exit Sensor
ROS Assembly
ch404
Offset Drive Assembly
Fuser Drive Assembly
Full Stack Sensor
Offset Roller Assembly
Exit Roll Assembly
Inverter Cluthes
Lower Chute Assembly
Upper Chute Assembly
ch403
Rev.B
136
Chapter 4
Main Drive Assembly
Tray 1 Feed Clutch
Left Upper Cover Assembly
Registaration Clutch
Tray 1 Take Away Roll Assembly
Toner Sensor
Tray 1 Retard Asembly
Tray 2 Feed Clutch
MSI Support Assembly Tray 1 Lift Up Motor
Tray 2 Feeder Asembly
Support Assembly Spring CRU Interlock Switch
Tray 2 Retard Asembly
Registaration Chute Assembly
Tray 2 Take Away Roll Asembly
Registaration Roll Assembly
Registaration Sensor
Tray 1 & 2 Paper size Sensor
MCU PWB
High Voltage Power Supply Asembly ch405
Figure 4-6. Flowchart 5
Rev.B
137
Chapter 4
4.2.1 Fuser Full Cover

(See Top Cover Assembly on page -253 )
4.2.1.2 Installation
1. Open the Duplex Unit if one is installed. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Slide the tabs that are located at both ends of the Cover into the corresponding openings in the Top Cover Assembly. (See the figure below) 4. Lower the Fuser Full Cover onto the Fuser Assembly. 5. Press the Fuser Full Cover into place. Make sure the tabs remain in place, the Fuser Full Cover meshes smoothly with the Top Cover, and the two screw holes in the Fuser Full Cover line up with the holes in the printer frame. 6. Use two screws to secure the Fuser Full Cover.
4.2.1.1 Removal
1. Remove the Mailbox or the HCS if either are installed. 2. Open the Duplex Unit if one is installed. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover Assembly and remove the screw securing the Fuser Cover to the frame. (See the figure below) 4. Open the Front Left Cover and remove the screw securing the Fuser Cover to the frame. (See the figure below) 5. Lift the Fuser Cover off of the Top Cover Assembly.
Figure 4-8. Tabs of Fuser Full Cover
Figure 4-7. Fuser Full Cover Removal
Rev.B
138
Chapter 4
4.2.2 Top Cover Assembly

(See Top Cover Assembly on page -253)
5. Carefully lift the Top Cover a few inches off of the printer frame. 6. Disconnect the J417 from the Control Panel, and lift the Top Cover Assembly off of the printer frame.
4.2.2.1 Removal
1. Unplug the AC Power Cord from the rear of the printer. 2. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. (See Fuser Full Cover on page -138) 3. Disconnect J204 from the Fuser Fan. 4. Remove the two screws securing the right side of the Top Cover Assembly to the Right Cover (See figure below).
1. Unplug the AC Power Cord from the rear of the printer.
W A R N IN G
Do not reinstall the Top Cover while the AC power Cord is connected to the printer. While reinstalling the Top Cover you may accidently switch on the Main Power Switch.
2. Reconnect J417 to the Control Panel. 3. Reinstall the Top Cover Assembly onto the printer frame. 4. Make sure the screw holes at the right side of the Top Cover line up with the screw holes in the printer frame, and the left end of the Cover is under the Exit Chute Pinch Rolls. 5. Use two screws to secure the Top Cover Assembly to the Right Cover. 6. REconnect J204 to the Fuser Fan. 7. Reinstall the Fuser Full Cover. (See Fuser Full Cover on page -138)
Figure 4-9. Removal of Top Cover Assembly
Rev.B
139
Chapter 4
4.2.3 Rear Cover Assembly

(See Rear, Left and Right Cover on page -255)
4.2.3.1 Removal
1. Remove the AC power cord from the rear of the printer. 2. Remove the two screws securing the Rear Cover Assembly to the printer frame. 3. Pull the bottom of the Rear Cover away from the printer frame and slide the Cover down to remove it.
1. Slide the top edge of the Rear Cover under the edge of the Top Cover, then press the Rear Cover against the printer frame. 2. Slide the Cover down so the bottom edge catches the lip of the printer frame. 3. Use two screws to secure the Rear Cover Assembly to the printer frame. 4. Reconnect the AC power cord to the rear of the printer. Figure 4-10. Removal of Rear Cover Assembly
Rev.B
140
Chapter 4
4.2.4 Right Cover

1. Raise the right end of the Top Cover. 2. Press the Right Cover against the printer frame and slide the Cover down until the two hooks at the bottom lip of the Cover are hooked in place under the Tray 1 Cover. 3. Press the top of the Right Cover against the printer frame while you lower the Top Cover. Make sure the Top Cover screw tabs rest on top of the Right Cover. 4. Use two screws to secure the Right Cover (and Top Cover) to the printer frame.
4.2.4.1 Removal
1. Remove the two screws securing the Top Cover to the Right Cover. 2. Carefully raise the right end of the Top Cover and at the same time lift the Right Cover up and away from the printer frame.
Figure 4-11. Removal of Right Cover
Rev.B
141
Chapter 4
4.2.5 Control Panel

(See Top Cover Assembly on page -253)
1. Position the Control Panel over the opening in the Top Cover Assembly, and press the Panel into the opening. The panel snaps into place. 2. Reconnect J417. 3. Reinstall the Top Cover. (See Top Cover Assembly on page -139)
4.2.5.1 Removal
1. Remove the Top Cover. (See Top Cover Assembly on page -139) 2. Disconnect the J417 from the Control Panel. 3. Push in on the four tabs securing the Control Panel to the Top Cover, while you press the Control Panel out of the Cover.
Figure 4-12. Removal of Control Panel
Rev.B
142
Chapter 4
4.2.6 Rear Cover 1TM

1. Reinstall the Rear Cover 1TM by first hooking the bottom edge of the Cover onto the frame, then pressing the top of the Cover against the frame. 2. Use two screws to secure the Cover to the printer frame. 3. Reconnect the option plugs to the Plug Jack located at the rear of the printer.
4.2.6.1 Removal
1. Disconnect all option plugs from the Plug Jack located at the rear of the printer. 2. Remove the two screws securing the Rear Cover 1TM to the printer frame. 3. Lift up on the Cover and remove it from the printer frame.
Figure 4-13. Removal of Rear Cover 1TM
Rev.B
143
Chapter 4
4.2.7 Tray 1 Lift Up Motor

(See Tray Interface -Tray 1 on page -258)
1. Reinstall the Lift Up Motor onto the printer frame. Be careful not to trap any wires between the Motor and the frame. 2. Use three long screws to secure the Motor to the frame. Use one screw on the lower left and two screws on the right side of the Motor. 3. Reconnect J203 to the rear of the Lift Up Motor. 4. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 5. Slide Tray 1 into the printer.
4.2.7.1 Removal
1. Slide Tray 1 halfway out of the printer. 2. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Disconnect the J203 from the rear of Tray 1 Lift Up Motor. 4. Remove the three long screws securing the Motor to the printer frame. 5. Slide the Motor out to remove it.
Figure 4-14. Removal of Tray 1 Lift Up Motor
Rev.B
144
Chapter 4
4.2.8 Tray 1 Feed Clutch

(See Tray Interface -Tray 1 on page -258)
1. Position the Feed Clutch over the end of the Feed Shaft. 2. Reposition the Feed Clutch so it fits the key notch on the shaft and you can feel the Clutch slide onto the shaft, and press the Clutch onto the shaft until the Clutch P/J clears the Support Spring. 3. Rotate the Clutch until the slot in the Clutch lines up with the key on the frame. 4. Press the Clutch onto the shaft until it stops, and make sure the key on the frame is in the slot in the Clutch. 5. Use an E ring to secure the Clutch to the shaft. 6. Reconnect J202 to the Feed Clutch. 7. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (See Rear Cover Assembly on page -140)
4.2.8.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Open the Duplex Unit. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Disconnect J202 from the Tray 1 Feed Clutch. 5. Remove the E ring that is securing the Feed Clutch to the shaft. 6. Slide the Feed Clutch away from the printer frame, then rotate the Clutch until you have enough clearance from the Support Spring to slide the Clutch completely off of the shaft.
Figure 4-15. Removal of Tray 1 Feed Clutch
Rev.B
145
Chapter 4
4.2.9 Feed, Nudger, and Retard Rolls

(See Paper Pick Up - Tray 1 on page -259 and Retard and Take Away- Tray 2 on page -263)
C H E C K P O IN T
4. Reinstall the Chute by sliding the opening in the rear of the Chute into the tab on the frame, then slightly squeezing the Chute and hooking the tab at the front of the Chute into the opening on the frame. 5. Reinstall the paper tray. 6. Reset the Paper Feeder Usage Log for the feeder with the new Rolls.

Use this procedure for Feeders1 and Feeders 2. Replace the Feeder, Nudger, and Retard Rolls as a unit. If Feed Roll is exchanged, be sure to perform LC15 Counter Clear. (See Panel Setting Mode on page -26 and Maintenance Mode on page -46)
4.2.9.1 Removal
1. Remove the paper tray from the appropriate feeder. 2. Press in on the front of the Chute, and remove the Chute. 3. Pull out on the Roll latch and slide the Roll off of the shaft. 4. Repeat step 3 for the remaining two Rolls.
1. Position the Roll with the latch end facing out, and slide the Roll onto the shaft. 2. Rotate and push the Roll down the shaft until the latch locks the Roll into place. 3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining two Rolls. Figure 4-16. Removal of Feed, Nudger&Retard Rolls
Rev.B
146
Chapter 4
4.2.10 Tray1 Take Away Roll Assembly

(See Retard and Take Away- Tray 2 on page -263)
12. Remove Tray 1 Lift Motor. (Tray 1 Lift Up Motor on page -144)
4.2.10.1 Removal
1. Remove the Duplex Unit, if one is installed. 2. Remove the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 3. Remove Tray 1 and Tray 2. 4. Remove the Left Upper Cover Assembly. (Left Upper Cover Assembly on page -185) 5. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 6. Remove the MSI Support Assembly. (MSI Support Assembly on page -166) 7. Remove the retaining clip from the docking stud that is located at the lower right of the Tray, and remove the stud. 8. Remove the screw securing the docking clip to Tray 2, and remove the clip. 9. Disconnect P403, P404, P406, and P408 from the MCU PWB. 10. Remove the screw securing the Option Connector Bracket the frame, and remove the Bracket. 11. Remove the screw securing the retaining clip that is located under the Option Connector Bracket, and remove the clip. (Figure on your right)
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-17. Removal of Bracket The following steps has you lift the printer. The printer is very heavy and requires two people to lift it. Do not attempt to lift the printer by yourself.
13. Lift the printer off of Tray 2. 14. Set the printer, with the right side down, on a level and stable work surface.
Rev.B
147
Chapter 4
1. Reinstall Tray 1 Take Away Roll Assembly onto the bottom of the printer frame. 2. Align the two plastic mounting pins, located on the top of the Assembly, with the two mounting holes located in the bottom of the printer frame. 3. Press the Assembly into the frame so the mounting pins snap into the holes. 4. Use two screws to secure the front of the Assembly to the printer frame. 5. Use four screws to secure the rear of the Assembly to the printer frame. 6. Reinstall Tray 1 Feed Clutch, along with the Gear and Bearing. (Tray 1 Feed Clutch on page -145) 7. Reinstall the Support Assembly Spring. (Support Assembly Spring on page -152)
C A U T IO N
Figure 4-18. Removal of Tray1 Take Away Roll Assembly 15. Remove the Support Assembly Spring. (Support Assembly Spring on page -152) 16. Remove Tray 1 Feed Clutch, along with the Gear and Bearing. (Tray 1 Feed Clutch on page -145) 17. Remove the four screws securing Tray 1 Take Away Roll Assembly to the rear of the frame. 18. Remove the two screws securing Tray 1 Take Away Roll Assembly to the front of the frame.
The following steps has you lift the printer. The printer is very heavy and requires two people to lift it. Do not attempt to lift the printer by yourself.
8. Set the printer onto Tray 2. 19. Locate the two plastic mounting pins, located at each end of the Assembly, that secure the top of the Assembly to the bottom of the printer frame. 20. Press the two plastic mounting pins out of the mounting holes, and pull Tray 1 Take Away Assembly away from the printer. 9. Reinstall Tray 1 Lift Motor. (Tray 1 Lift Up Motor on page -144) 10. Reinstall the retaining clip that is located under the Option Connector Bracket, and use one screw to secure the clip.
Rev.B
148
11. Reinstall the Option Connector Bracket to the frame, and use one screw to secure the Bracket. 12. Reconnect P403, P404, P406, and P408 to the MCU PWB. 13. Reinstall the docking clip to Tray 2, and use one screw to secure the clip. 14. Reinstall the docking stud located at the lower right of the Tray, and use a retaining clip to secure the stud. 15. Reinstall the MSI Support Assembly. (MSI Support Assembly on page -166) 16. Reinstall the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 17. Reinstall the Left Upper Cover Assembly. 18. Reinstall Tray 1 and Tray 2. 19. Reinstall the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 20. Reinstall the Duplex Unit, if one was installed.
Chapter 4
Rev.B
149
Chapter 4
4.2.11 Tray 1 Feeder Assembly

(See Paper Pick Up - Tray 1 on page -259)
C A U T IO N
Take care not to break or dislodge the No Paper Actuator when removing or replacing the Tray1 Feeder Assembly.
4.2.11.1 Removal
1. Tray 1 from the printer. 2. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Remove the Front Chute. (Tray 1&2 Front Chute Assemblies on page -155) Figure 4-19. Removal of Tray1 Feed Clutch 4. Remove Tray 1 Feed Clutch along with the Feed Gear and Bearing. (Tray 1 Feed Clutch on page -145) (Refer to the figure). 5. Remove the E ring that is securing the Feed Gear (located behind the Feed Clutch) to the shaft, and remove the Feed Gear and Bearing. 6. Hold down the Stopper Link while you pull the Feeder Assembly to the front of the printer frame. 7. Remove the Feeder Assembly from Feeder 1.
Rev.B
150
Chapter 4
1. Hold down the Stopper Link while you insert the end of the Feed Shaft into the opening in the rear of the printer frame. 2. Slide the Bearing into the Bearing cutout (refer to the figure). 3. When both the Bearing is in place and the end of the Feed Shaft is through the opening in the rear of the frame, release the Stopper Link. 4. The Nudger Shaft should rest on top of the Stopper Link, and the Link should secure the Feeder Assembly in place on the frame. 5. Make sure the Paper Level Actuator tab on the Feeder is positioned in the center of the arms of the Paper Level Sensor. 6. Slide the Feed Bearing onto the Feed Shaft and press the Bearing into the cutout in the frame. 7. Reinstall the Feed Gear onto the Feed Shaft, and use an E ring to secure it to the Shaft. 8. Reinstall Tray 1 Feed Clutch along with the Feed Gear and Bearing. (Tray 1 Feed Clutch on page -145) 9. Reinstall the Front Chute. (Tray 1&2 Front Chute Assemblies on page -155) 10. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 11. Reinstall Tray 1. Figure 4-20. Removal of Tray1 Feed Assembly
Rev.B
151
Chapter 4
4.2.12 Support Assembly Spring

(See Retard and Take Away-Tray 1 on page -260)
1. Reinstall the Support Assembly Spring. (Refer to the figure for correct positioning). 2. Make sure the front and rear arms of the Spring are positioned as shown in the figure. 3. Use one screw to secure the Spring to the frame. 4. Reinstall Tray 1 Lift Up Motor. (Tray 1 Lift Up Motor on page -144)
4.2.12.1 Removal
1. Remove Tray 1 Lift Up Motor. (Tray 1 Lift Up Motor on page -144) 2. Remove the screw securing the Support Assembly Spring to the printer frame, and remove the Spring.
Figure 4-21. Removal of Support Assembly Spring
Rev.B
152
Chapter 4
4.2.13 Tray1 Retard Assembly

(See Retard and Take Away-Tray 1 on page -260)
11. Remove the Center Bearing on the Take Away Roll Shaft, and slide the Roll out of the Retard Support.
4.2.13.1 Removal
1. Remove Tray 1 Take Away Roll Assembly. (Tray1 Take Away Roll Assembly on page -147) 2. Remove the Left Middle Cover. (L/H Low Cover Assembly on page -178) 3. Remove the screw securing the Feed In Chute to the Assembly, and slide the Chute to the front of the Assembly to remove it. 4. Remove the plastic Feed Chute (Retard and Take Away-Tray 1 on page -260) from the Take Away Roll. 5. Unhook the spring from the Retard Support. 6. Remove Tray 1 Support Assembly Spring. (Support Assembly Spring on page -152) 7. Remove the screw securing the Gear Stopper (Retard and Take Away-Tray 1 on page -260) to the Assembly, and move the Stopper out of the way. 8. Remove the E ring securing Gear 22/20 (Retard and Take AwayTray 1 on page -260) to the shaft and remove the Gear. 9. Remove the plastic bearing securing the Take Away Roll Shaft to the front of the Retard Frame, and remove the Retard Assembly and Take Away Roll. 10. Remove the E rings and Gears attached to the rear of the Take Away Roll Shaft.
Figure 4-22. Disassembly of Tray1 Retard Assembly
1. Reinstall the Take Away Roll Shaft onto the Retard Support. 2. Reinstall the Center Bearing onto the Take Away Roll Shaft, and secure the Shaft to the Support. 3. Reinstall the Gears (Retard and Take Away-Tray 1 on page -260) and E rings to the rear of the Take Away Roll Shaft. 4. Reinstall the Retard Assembly and Take Away Roll back into the Retard Frame. 5. Reinstall the plastic bearing into the hole at the front of the Retard Frame. 6. Reinstall Gear 22/20 to the rear of the shaft, and use an E ring to secure the Gear.
Rev.B
153
7. Align the screw hole in the Gear Stopper with the screw hole in the frame, and use one screw to secure the Stopper. 8. Reinstall the Tray 1 Support Assembly Spring. (Support Assembly Spring on page -152) 9. Reattach the spring to the Retard Support. 10. Reinstall the plastic Feed Chute to the Take Away Roll. 11. Reinstall the Feed In Chute, and use one screw to secure it to the Assembly. 12. Reinstall the Left Middle Cover (L/H Low Cover Assembly on page -178). 13. Reinstall Tray 1 Take Away Roll Assembly. (See Tray1 Take Away Roll Assembly on page -147)
Chapter 4
Rev.B
154
Chapter 4
4.2.14 Tray 1&2 Front Chute Assemblies

(See Tray Interface -Tray 1 on page -258 and Tray Interface-Tray 2 on page -261)
1. Remove either Paper Tray 1 or Paper Tray 2. 2. Reinstall the Chute by sliding the opening in the rear of the Chute into the tab on the printer frame, then hooking the tab at the front of the Chute into the opening on the frame. 3. Reinstall the Paper Tray.
4.2.14.1 Removal
1. Remove either Paper Tray 1 or Paper Tray 2. 2. Use a flat blade screwdriver to unhook the front of the Chute, and remove the Chute.
Figure 4-23. Removal of Front Chute
Rev.B
155
Chapter 4
8. Reinstall the Paper Tray.
4.2.15 Tray 1 & Tray 2 Level Sensors

(See Tray Interface -Tray 1 on page -258 and Tray Interface-Tray 2 on page -261) Use this procedure for removing and replacing the Paper Level Sensors for Trays 1 and 2.
4.2.15.1 Removal
1. Remove the Paper Tray associated with the Paper Level Sensor you are going to remove. 2. Squeeze the Sensor latches and remove the Paper Level Sensor from the frame. 3. Disconnect the P/J from the Sensor.
1. Reconnect the P/J to the Sensor. 2. Position the Sensor with the arms of the Sensor facing the Feed Assembly Actuator. 3. Reinstall the Paper Level Sensor into the slot in the frame by first inserting the front latch of the Sensor through the front opening in the frame. 4. Press in on the rear latch and inserting it into the rear opening. 5. Release the rear latch and the Sensor snaps into place. 6. Release the Actuator and make sure it moves freely between the arms of the Sensor. 7. Reconnect the P/J to the Sensor. Figure 4-24. Removal of Level Sensor
Rev.B
156
Chapter 4
8. Reconnect the P/J to the Sensor. 9. Reinstall the Paper Tray.
4.2.16 Tray1 & Tray 2 No Paper Sensors

(See Tray Interface -Tray 1 on page -258 and Tray Interface-Tray 2 on page -261) Use this procedure for removing and reassembling the No Paper Sensors for Trays 1 and 2.
4.2.16.1 Removal
1. Remove the Paper Tray associated with the No Paper Sensor you are going to remove. 2. Squeeze the Sensor latches and remove the No Paper Sensor from the frame. 3. Disconnect the P/J from the Sensor.
1. Reconnect the P/J to the Sensor. 2. Push the No Paper Actuator up and out of the way. 3. Position the Sensor with the arms of the Sensor facing the Actuator. 4. Reinstall the No Paper Sensor into the slot in the frame by first inserting the front latch of the Sensor through the front opening in the frame. 5. Press in on the rear latch and inserting it into the rear opening. 6. Release the rear latch and the Sensor snaps into place. 7. Release the Actuator and make sure it moves freely between the arms of the Sensor. Figure 4-25. Removal of No Paper Sensor
Rev.B
157
Chapter 4
4.2.17 Tray 1 & Tray 2 Paper Size Sensors

(See Tray Interface -Tray 1 on page -258 and Tray Interface-Tray 2 on page -261)
4.2.17.1 Removal
1. Remove either Paper Tray 1 or Paper Tray 2 from the printer. 2. Disconnect the P/J from the Size Sensor PWB. 3. Remove the screw securing the Size Sensor PWB to the printer frame, pull the PWB straight out and remove it from the frame.
1. Remove either Paper Tray 1 or Paper Tray 2 from the printer. Figure 4-26. Removal of Tray1 Paper Size Sensor 2. Reinstall the Paper Size Sensor PWB onto the printer frame. Align the positioning tabs and screw holes. 3. Reconnect the P/J to the Size Sensor PWB. 4. Use one screw to secure the PWB to the frame. 5. Reinstall the Paper Tray.
Figure 4-27. Removal of Tray2 Paper Size Sensor
Rev.B
158
Chapter 4
4.2.18 Tray 2 Feed Clutch

(See Paper Pick Up-Tray 2 on page -262)
4.2.18.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover 1TM. (See Rear Cover 1TM on page -143) 2. Disconnect J240 from the Feed Clutch. 3. Remove the E ring securing the Clutch to the shaft, and slide the Clutch off of the shaft. 4. Remove the E ring securing the Gear to the shaft, and slide the Gear and Bearing off of the shaft.
1. Slide the Bearing onto the shaft, and seat it in the cutout in the printer frame. 2. Slide the Gear onto the shaft, and use an E ring to secure it to the shaft. 3. Slide the Feed Clutch onto the shaft, making sure the positioning notch on the shaft hooks onto the tab on the frame. 4. Use an E ring to secure the Clutch to the shaft. 5. Reconnect J240 to the Feed Clutch. 6. Reinstall the Rear Cover 1TM. (Rear Cover 1TM on page -143) Figure 4-28. Removal of Tray2 Feed Clutch
Rev.B
159
Chapter 4
4.2.19 Tray 2 Feeder Assembly

(See Paper Pick Up - Tray 1 on page -259)
C A U T IO N
Take care not to break or dislodge the NO Paper Actuator when removing or replacing the Tray2 Feeder Assembly.
4.2.19.1 Removal
1. Tray 2 from the printer. 2. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Remove the Front Chute. (Tray 1&2 Front Chute Assemblies on page -155) 4. Remove Tray 2 Feed Clutch along with the Feed Gear and Bearing. (Tray 2 Feed Clutch on page -159) (Refer to the figure on your right). 5. Remove the E ring that is securing the Feed Gear (located behind the Feed Clutch) to the shaft, and remove the Feed Gear and Bearing. 6. Hold down the Stopper Link while you pull the Feeder Assembly to the front of the printer frame. 7. Remove the Feeder Assembly from Feeder 2.
Figure 4-29. Removal of Tray2 Feeder Assembly
Rev.B
160
Chapter 4
1. Hold down the Stopper Link while you insert the end of the Feed Shaft into the opening in the rear of the printer frame. 2. Slide the Bearing into the Bearing cutout (refer to the figure on the previous page). 3. When both the Bearing is in place and the end of the Feed Shaft is through the opening in the rear of the frame, release the Stopper Link. 4. The Nudger Shaft should rest on top of the Stopper Link, and the Link should secure the Feeder Assembly in place on the frame. 5. Make sure the Paper Level Actuator tab on the Feeder is positioned in the center of the arms of the Paper Level Sensor. 6. Slide the Feed Bearing onto the Feed Shaft and press the Bearing into the cutout in the frame. 7. Reinstall the Feed Gear onto the Feed Shaft, and use an E ring to secure it to the Shaft. 8. Reinstall Tray 2 Feed Clutch along with the Feed Gear and Bearing. (Tray 2 Feed Clutch on page -159) 9. Reinstall the Front Chute. (Tray 1&2 Front Chute Assemblies on page -155) 10. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 11. Reinstall Tray 2.
Rev.B
161
Chapter 4
4.2.20 Tray2 Take Away Roll Assembly

1. Reinstall the Take Away Roll shaft onto the Retard Support. 2. Reinstall the Center Bearing onto the Take Away Roll shaft, and secure the shaft to the Support. 3. Reinstall the Gears and E rings to the rear of the Take Away Roll shaft. 4. Reinstall Tray 2 Retard Assembly. (Tray 2 Retard Assembly on page -163)
4.2.20.1 Removal
1. Remove Tray 2 Retard Assembly. (Tray 2 Retard Assembly on page -163) 2. Remove the E rings and Gears attached to the rear of the Take Away Roll shaft. 3. Remove the Center Bearing on the Take Away Roll Shaft, and slide the Roll out of the Retard Support.
Figure 4-30. Removal of Tray2 Take Away Roll Assembly
Rev.B
162
Chapter 4
4.2.21 Tray 2 Retard Assembly

4. Reinstall Gear 22 to the rear of the shaft, and use an E ring to secure the Gear. 5. Align the screw hole in the Gear Stopper with the screw hole in the frame, and use one screw to secure the Stopper. 6. Reattach the spring to the Retard Support. 7. Reinstall the plastic Feed Chute to the Take Away Roll. 8. Reinstall the Feed In Chute, and use one screw to secure it to the Assembly.
4.2.21.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Lower Cover. 2. Remove the screw securing the Feed In Chute to the Assembly, and slide the Chute to the front of the Assembly to remove it. 3. Remove the plastic Feed Chute from the Take Away Roll. 4. Unhook the spring from the Retard Support. 5. Remove the screw securing the Gear Stopper to the Assembly, and move the Stopper out of the way. 6. Remove the E ring securing Gear 22 to the shaft and remove the Gear. 7. Remove the plastic bearing securing the Take Away Roll Shaft to the front of the printer frame, and remove the Retard Assembly and attached Take Away Roll. 8. Remove the Take Away Roll. (Tray2 Take Away Roll Assembly on page -162)
1. Reinstall the Take Away Roll Shaft onto the Retard Support. (Tray2 Take Away Roll Assembly on page -162) 2. Reinstall the Retard Assembly and Take Away Roll back into the printer frame. 3. Reinstall the plastic bearing into the hole at the front of the frame. Figure 4-31. Removal of Tray2 Retard Assembly
Rev.B
163
Chapter 4
4.2.22 MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder)

(See MSI Feeder Assembly on page -266)
4.2.23 MSI Tray Assembly

(See MSI Tray Assembly on page -164)
4.2.22.1 Removal
1. Face the left side of the printer. 2. Hold both sides of the MSI Feeder Assembly and firmly pull the Assembly toward you and out of the printer.
4.2.23.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164) 2. Remove the two screws securing the MSI Top Cover to the MSI Assembly, and remove the Top Cover.
1. Face the left side of the printer. 2. Position the MSI Feeder against the MSI Support. 3. Tilt the MSI Feeder so the Feed Gear slides through the cutout in the printer cover. 4. Hold the MSI Feeder Assembly level and push the Assembly against the printer.
Figure 4-33. Remove l of MSI Top Cover
Figure 4-32. Removal of MSI Feeder Assembly
Rev.B
164
3. Disconnect the P/J that runs from the Tray Assembly to the Feeder Assembly. 4. Release the Tray Spring that is attached to the left side of the Tray. 5. Push out on the Front Support as you slightly bow the Tray, and release the pivot hole on the right side of the Tray from the metal shaft on the Front Support. 6. Remove the MSI Tray Assembly.
Chapter 4
1. Slide pivot hole on the left side of the Tray onto the metal shaft on the Rear Support. 2. Push out on the Front Support as you slightly bow the Tray, and slid the pivot hole on the right side of the Tray into the metal shaft on the Front Support. 3. Insert the free end of the Tray Spring into the slot at the bottom edge of the Tray. 4. Reconnect the P/J that runs from the Tray Assembly to the Feeder Assembly. 5. Reinstall the MSI Top Cover and use two screws to secure it to the MSI Assembly. 6. Reinstall the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164) 7. Reinstall the Duplex Unit if one was installed.
Figure 4-34. Removal of MSI Tray Assembly
Rev.B
165
Chapter 4
4.2.24 MSI Support Assembly

(See Multi Sheet Inserter and MSI/Duplex Support on page -265)
6. Reinstall the Rear Cover Assembly. Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 7. Reinstall the Rear Support Cover and use one screw to secure it to the Support Assembly. 8. Reinstall the Front Support Cover and use one screw to secure it to the Support Assembly. 9. Reinstall the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164)
4.2.24.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164) 2. Remove the one screw securing the Front Support Cover to the Support Assembly, and remove the Cover. 3. Remove the one screw securing the Rear Support Cover to the Support Assembly, and remove the Cover. 4. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 5. Disconnect J603. 6. Remove the four screws securing the MSI Support Assembly to the printer frame, and remove the Assembly.
1. Position the MSI Support Assembly a few inches from the printer frame. 2. Insert the wire harness into the cutout in the printer frame. 3. Slide the two positioning pins that are located at both ends of the Support Assembly into the holes in the frame. 4. Use four screws to secure the Assembly to the frame. 5. Reconnect J603. Figure 4-35. Removal of MSI Support Assembly
Rev.B
166
Chapter 4
4.2.25 MSI Size Sensor Assembly

4.2.25.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164) 2. Place the MSI Feeder upside down, with the Tray facing you. 3. Remove the two screws securing the Lower Cover to the Upper Cover. 4. Locate the three latches on the right side of the Tray. (See the figure) 5. Press the first latch while you pry the edge of the Lower Cover out of the Upper Cover. 6. Repeat step 4 for the remaining two latches located on the right side of the Tray. 7. Repeat step 4 for the two latches that are located on the left side of the Tray, and remove the Lower Cover from the Upper Cover. 8. Remove the MSI Tray. 9. Squeeze together the latches holding the MSI Size Sensor to the MSI Side Guide, and pry the Sensor off away from the Upper Cover. 10. Disconnect J107 and remove the Sensor Assembly. Figure 4-36. Removal of MSI Size Sensor Assembly
Rev.B
167
Chapter 4
1. Reinstall the MSI Side Guide, making sure the two latch tabs at the bottom of the Guide fit through the cutout in the Upper Cover.
C H E C K P O IN T
10. Press at the five latch locations to make sure the latches have locked the Lower Cover in place. 11. Use two screws to secure the Lower Cover to the Upper Cover. 12. Reinstall the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164)

Be sure to engage the actuator of MSI Sensor and the hole of MSI Size Link. Be sure that actuator also moves when you mode the Link.
2. Slide the Side Guide all the way to the right (toward the MSI Tray Spring). 3. Hold the Side Guide in place while you press the two holes in the Size Sensor onto the two latch tabs. Press hard enough so the Size Sensor locks into place. 4. Make sure the spring-loaded arm of the Sensor is under the molded track. 5. Slide the Sensor Assembly to the left to make sure it moves smoothly and the spring-loaded arm lowers as you move the Sensor to the left, and raises when you move the Sensor to the right. 6. Route the Sensor wire harness along the molded channel and through the cutout on the right side of the Upper Cover. 7. Reconnect J107. 8. Reinstall the MSI Tray, with the arrow side facing down. 9. Slide the three tabs on the upper edge of the Lower Cover into the three cutouts in Upper Cover, and press the Lower Cover onto the Upper Cover.
Rev.B
168
Chapter 4
4.2.26 MSI Feed Clutch

(See Upper Feeder Assembly on page -267)
4. Disconnect the J208 running to the MSI Feed Clutch. 5. Remove the screw securing the Rear Hook Bracket to the Feeder Assembly and remove the Bracket (Figure below).
4.2.26.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Tray Assembly. (MSI Tray Assembly on page -164) 2. Remove MSI Top Cover. 3. Remove the screw securing the MSI Tray Support (PL4.1.9) to the Feeder Assembly, and pull the Support away from the Assembly (Figure below).
Figure 4-38. Removal of Rear Hook Bracket
Figure 4-37. Removal of MSI Tray Support
Rev.B
169
6. Remove the E-ring securing the MSI Link Gear to the idler shaft, and slide the Gear, along with the MSI Drive Gear Assembly off of the shaft (Figure below).
Chapter 4
Figure 4-40. Removal of MSI Feed Clutch Figure 4-39. Removal of MSI Link Gear 7. Remove the E-ring securing the MSI Feed Clutch to the Feed Shaft and slide the Clutch off of the Feed Shaft (Figure right).
Rev.B
170
Chapter 4
1. Position the MSI Feed Clutch with the gear facing out, and slide the Clutch onto the Feed Shaft. 2. Thread the Clutch wire harness through the cutout in the Support frame. 3. Rotate the Clutch so the notch in the Clutch fits into the key in the Assembly (Figure on the previous page). 4. Use and E-ring to secure the MSI Feed Clutch to the Feed Shaft. 5. Reinstall the Link Spring onto the Rear Latch (Figure on the previous page). 6. Slide the MSI Link Gear, along with the MSI Drive Gear Assembly, onto the idler shaft. 7. Use an E-ring to secure the MSI Link Gear to the idler shaft. 8. Reinstall the Rear Hook Bracket to the Feeder Assembly, and use one screw to secure the Bracket. 9. Reconnect J208. 10. Reinstall the MSI Tray Support and use a screw to secure it to the Feeder Assembly. 11. Reinstall the MSI Tray Assembly. (MSI Tray Assembly on page -164)
Rev.B
171
Chapter 4
4.2.27 MSI Feed Roll

1. Position the Feed Roll so the metal end of the hole is facing the NoPaper Sensor.
C H E C K P O IN T
4.2.27.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Tray Assembly. (MSI Tray Assembly on page -164) 2. Remove the screw securing the MSI No-Paper Sensor Bracket (Upper Feeder Assembly on page -267) to the Feeder Assembly, and lift the Sensor Bracket out of the way. 3. Remove the KL clip securing the MSI Feed Roll to the Feed Shaft, and slide the Feed Roll off of the shaft.
One-way clutch is built in the Feed Roll. Be careful for the direction of the clutch when installing it. If this clutch is installed wrong, it causes paper feed failure.
2. Press down the Retard Pad and slide the MSI Feed Roll onto the Feed Shaft. 3. Use a KL clip to secure the Roll to the shaft. 4. Reinstall the No-Paper Sensor Bracket onto the Feeder Assembly, and use one screw to secure it to the Assembly. 5. Reinstall the MSI Tray Assembly. (MSI Tray Assembly on page -164)
Figure 4-41. Removal of MSI Feed Roll
Rev.B
172
Chapter 4
4.2.28 MSI Nudger Roll

1. Slide the Nudger Roll, forked end first, onto the Nudger Shaft, making sure the forked end engages the pin at the end of the shaft. 2. Use an E-clip to secure the Nudger Roll to the Shaft. 3. Slide the MSI Gate onto the Shaft (see the illustration for correct positioning of the Gate). 4. Use an E-clip to secure the Gate to the Shaft. 5. Reinstall the No-Paper Sensor Bracket onto the Feeder Assembly, and use one screw to secure it to the Assembly. 6. Reinstall the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164)
4.2.28.1 Removal
1. Remove MSI Feed Roll. (MSI Feed Roll on page -172) 2. Remove the E-clip securing the MSI Gate (Upper Feeder Assembly on page -267) to the Nudger Shaft and remove the Gate. 3. Remove the E-clip securing the Nudger Roll to the Nudger Shaft and slide the Nudger Roll off of the shaft.
Figure 4-42. Removal of MSI Nudger Roll
Rev.B
173
Chapter 4
4.2.29 MSI Nudger Roll Assembly

1. Reinstall the Front and Rear Feed Bearings onto the Nudger Roll Assembly (see the figure for correct placement). 2. Hook one end of the Feed Spring over the Nudger Roll Assembly frame. 3. Reinstall the Nudger Roll Assembly into the MSI Feeder Assembly. 4. Hold the Feed Gear in place, with the flat side against the Nudger Roll Assembly. 5. Slide the Feed Shaft through the Feed Gear, through the Rear Feed Bearing, through the Nudger Roll Assembly, through the Feed Spring, through the Front MSI Bearing, and out through the cutout for the Front Feed Bearing. 6. Slip the Front Feed Bearing over the end of the Feed Shaft, and slide the Bearing into the cutout in the frame. 7. Continue sliding the Feed Shaft as far as it will go. 8. Use an E ring to secure the Shaft to the Front Feed Bearing. 9. Hook the free end of the Feed Spring through the opening at the rear of the Assembly frame. 10. Reinstall the MSI Feed Roll. (MSI Feed Roll on page -172) 11. Reinstall the MSI Feed Clutch. (MSI Feed Clutch on page -169)
4.2.29.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Feed Clutch. (MSI Feed Clutch on page -169) 2. Remove MSI Feed Roll. (MSI Feed Roll on page -172) 3. Remove the E-ring securing the MSI Front Feed Bearing to the Feed Shaft, and remove the Bearing. 4. Slide the Feed Shaft out of the Nudger Roll Assembly, and remove the Assembly from the MSI Feeder frame. 5. Remove the Front and Rear Feed Bearings from the Nudger Roll Assembly.
Figure 4-43. Removal of MSI Nudger Roll Assembly
Rev.B
174
Chapter 4
4.2.30 MSI Pad

(See MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164)
7. Reinstall the MSI Feed Roll. (MSI Feed Roll on page -172)
4.2.30.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Feed Roll. (MSI Feed Roll on page -172) 2. Remove the MSI Nudger Roll. (MSI Nudger Roll on page -173) 3. Turn the MSI Feeder upside down. 4. Remove the KL clip securing the MSI Pad Pin to the Feeder, and slide the Pin out of the MSI Pad. 5. Turn the MSI Feeder right side up. 6. Pull back the MSI Paper Guide and slide the MSI Pad to the right and out of the Feeder.
1. Pull back the MSI Paper Guide and slide the MSI Pad between the Guide and the Pad Spring. 2. Turn the MSI Feeder upside down. 3. Slide the MSI Pad Pin into the hole in the Feeder, through the holes in the three legs of the MSI Pad, and out through the other hole in the Feeder. 4. Use a KL clip to secure the MSI Pad Pin to the Feeder. 5. Press down on the MSI Pad to make sure it moves smoothly and has a spring-action return. 6. Reinstall the MSI Nudger Roll. (MSI Nudger Roll on page -173) Figure 4-44. Removal of MSI Pad
Rev.B
175
Chapter 4
4.2.31 MSI Friction Clutch

4.2.31.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Tray Assembly. (MSI Tray Assembly on page -164) 2. Remove the E ring securing the Clutch to the shaft. 3. Rotate the Clutch clockwise as you pull the it off of the shaft.
1. Make sure the Spacer is in place on the Clutch shaft. 2. Rotate the Spacer so the tabs on the Spacer mesh with the notches on the Clutch Gear. Figure 4-45. Removal of MSI Friction Clutch
C A U T IO N
When performing step3, push only the rear of the Clutch. Never press the sides of the Clutch. Pressing the sides of the Clutch will cause the Clutch break apart.
3. Slide the Friction Clutch onto the shaft, rotating the Clutch as you slide it toward the Spacer. 4. Make sure the Clutch and Spacer mesh. 5. Use one E ring to secure the Clutch to the shaft. 6. Reinstall the MSI Tray Assembly. (MSI Tray Assembly on page -164)
Rev.B
176
Chapter 4
4.2.32 MSI No-Paper Sensor Assembly

8. Manually actuate the No Paper Actuator to make sure it moves freely between the arms of the Sensor. 9. Reinstall the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164)
4.2.32.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Feeder Assembly. (MSI Feeder Assembly (Manual Feeder) on page -164) 2. Remove the screw securing the MSI No-Paper Sensor Bracket to the Feeder Assembly, and lift the Sensor Bracket off of the Feeder. 3. Disconnect the P/J from the No-Paper Sensor. 4. Squeeze the Sensor latches and remove the Sensor from the Bracket.
1. Position the Senor so the P/J connector faces the screw hole in the Sensor Bracket. 2. Insert the Sensor latches into the two opening in the Bracket. The Sensor snaps into place. 3. Make sure the arm of the No Paper Actuator is between the two arms of the Sensor. 4. Reconnect the P/J to the No-Paper Sensor. 5. Insert the Bracket prong through the keyhole opening in the back of the Feeder. 6. Slide the Bracket to the right so the screw hole in the Bracket lines up with the screw hole in the Feeder. 7. Use one screw to secure the Bracket to the Feeder. Figure 4-46. Removal of MSI No-Paper Sensor
Rev.B
177
Chapter 4
4.2.33 L/H Low Cover Assembly

(See Tray 1 Frame and Left Cover on page -269)
4. Remove the two Holding Springs, and lift the Pinch Roll out of the Bracket. 5. Remove the two Center Bearings, the two Shaft Springs, and the two End Brackets from the Shaft.
4.2.33.1 Removal
1. Remove the MSI Support Assembly. (MSI Support Assembly on page -166) 2. Remove the four screws securing the Left Middle Cover to the printer frame, and remove the Cover.
Figure 4-48. Disassembly of L/H Low Cover Assembly
Figure 4-47. Removal of Left Middle Cover 3. LIft the Pinch Roll Bracket off of the Left Middle Cover.
Rev.B
178
Chapter 4
1. Reinstall the two End Bearings onto the Shaft. 2. Reinstall the two Shaft Springs over the End Bearings. 3. Compress the Shaft Springs and reinstall the Shaft into the Bracket. Make sure that the lip of each Bearing is trapped behind the tabs in the Bracket, and that each Pinch Roll lines up with the corresponding cutout in the Bracket. 4. Hook one end of each Holding Spring into a spring hole in one side of the Bracket. 5. Bring the Springs over the Shaft and hook the other end of each Spring into the spring hole on the opposite side of the Bracket. 6. Slide a Center Bearing under each Holding Spring, as shown in the figure. 7. Reinstall the Pinch Roll Bracket onto the Left Middle Cover, as shown in the figure. 8. Reinstall the Left Middle Cover onto the printer frame. 9. Use four screws to secure the Left Middle Cover to the printer frame. 10. Reinstall the MSI Support Assembly. (MSI Support Assembly on page -166)
Rev.B
179
Chapter 4
4.2.34 Left Lower Cover Assembly

1. Reinstall the Front Hinge onto the pivot post on right side of the Left Lower Cover. 2. Reinstall the Left Lower Cover by first sliding the left pivot post into the Rear Hinge. 3. Use one screw to secure the Front Hinge to the printer frame. 4. Close the Left Lower Cover.
4.2.34.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Lower Cover. 2. Remove the screw securing the Front Hinge to the printer frame. 3. Pull the Left Lower Cover away from the printer frame.
Figure 4-49. Removal of Left Lower Cover Assembly
Rev.B
180
Chapter 4
4.2.35 Left Lower Cover Pinch Roll Assembly

6. Reinstall the Bracket onto the Left Lower Cover Assembly, and use three screws to secure it to the Assembly. 7. Reinstall the Left Lower Cover Assembly.(Left Lower Cover Assembly on page -180)
4.2.35.1 Removal
1. Remove the Left Lower Cover Assembly. (Left Lower Cover Assembly on page -180) 2. Remove the three screws securing the Pinch Roll Bracket to the Assembly, and remove the Bracket. 3. Unhook the two Pinch Roll Springs and lift the Pinch Roll out of the Bracket. 4. Remove the two Center Bearings and the two End Bearings from the Roll.
1. Reinstall an End Bearing to each end of the Pinch Roll. 2. Reinstall the Pinch Roll onto the Bracket. Make sure that the lip of each Bearing is trapped behind the tabs in the Bracket. 3. Hook one end of each Pinch Roll Spring into a spring hole in one side of the Bracket. 4. Bring the Springs over the Pinch Roll Shaft and hook the other end of each Spring into the spring hole on the opposite side of the Bracket. 5. Slide a Center Bearing under each Pinch Roll Spring, as shown in the figure. Figure 4-50. Removal of Left Lower Cover Pinch Roll Assembly
Rev.B
181
Chapter 4
4.2.36 Left Lower Cover Interlock Switch

(Tray 2 Frame and Left Cover on page -270)
1. Reconnect J144. 2. Squeeze the sides of the Switch while inserting the locating tab on the Switch into the opening in the frame. 3. Release the sides of the Switch and press it into the frame. 4. The Switch snaps into place. 5. Close the Left Lower Cover.
4.2.36.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Lower Cover. 2. Squeeze the sides of the Switch and pull it away from the printer frame. 3. Disconnect J144.
Figure 4-51. Removal of Left Lower Cover Interlock Switch
Rev.B
182
Chapter 4
4.2.37 Tray 2 Take Away Sensor

(Tray 2 Frame and Left Cover on page -270)
1. Reconnect J143 to the Sensor. 2. Insert the Sensor into the cutout in the frame. (See the figure for correct positioning). 3. Press in on the Sensor until it snaps into place. 4. Close the Left Lower Cover.
4.2.37.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Lower Cover. 2. Squeeze in all four Sensor latches while you pull the Sensor out of the printer frame. 3. Disconnect J143 from the Sensor.
Figure 4-52. Removal of Tray2 Take Away Sensor
Rev.B
183
Chapter 4
4.2.38 Registration Clutch

(See Registration on page -271)
1. Slide the Registration Clutch onto the shaft. The shaft latch snaps the Clutch into place on the shaft. 2. Use an E clip to secure the Registration Clutch to the Registration Shaft. 3. Reconnect P/J 200 from the Registration Clutch. 4. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140)
4.2.38.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Disconnect P/J 200 from the Registration Clutch. 3. Remove the E clip securing the Registration Clutch to the Registration Shaft. 4. Push out on the shaft latch as you slide the Clutch off of the shaft.
Figure 4-53. Removal of Registration Clutch
Rev.B
184
Chapter 4
4.2.39 Left Upper Cover Assembly

(See Left Upper Cover Assembly on page -272)
4.2.39.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Open the Duplex Unit. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover.
C A U T IO N
When the Left Upper Cover is open, the BTR is exposed. Do not touch the BRT. Grease and dirt on, or physical damage to the BTR will effect print quality.
4. Use a screwdriver blade to open the latch securing the Front Shaft Hinge, and slide the Hinge out of the Cover Assembly. Do not slide the Hinge completely out of the printer frame. 5. Use a screwdriver blade to open the latch securing the Rear Shaft Hinge, and slide the Hinge out of the Cover Assembly. Do not slide the Hinge completely out of the printer frame. 6. Pull the Left Upper Cover Assembly away from the printer frame. 7. Remove the two screws securing the two Cover Supports to the frame, and remove the Cover.
Figure 4-54. Removal of Left Upper Cover Assembly
Rev.B
185
Chapter 4
1. Open the Duplex Unit.
C A U T IO N
When the Left Upper Cover is open, the BTR is exposed. Do not touch the BRT. Grease and dirt on, or physical damage to the BTR will effect print quality.
2. Reinstall the Left Upper Cover Assembly so the hinge openings in the Cover arms line up with the hinge holes in the printer frame. 3. Slide the Rear Shaft Hinge into the hinge opening in the Rear Cover arm, until the latch locks the Hinge onto the shaft. 4. Slide the Front Shaft Hinge into the hinge opening in the Front Cover arm, until the latch locks the Hinge onto the shaft. 5. Use two screws to secure the two Cover Supports to the frame. 6. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 7. Open and close the Cover to make sure it opens and latches correctly.
Rev.B
186
Chapter 4
4.2.40 Left Chute Assembly

(See Left Upper Cover Assembly on page -272)
4. Lift the clear mylar strip out of the way as you lower the Chute onto the Upper Cover. 5. As you lower the Chute make sure the top of the two Comp Springs fit into the tabs on the underside of the Chute. 6. Press the front of the Chute so the two latches lock the front of the Chute into place. 7. Press the rear of the Chute so the two latches lock the rear of the Chute into place. (BTR Assembly (Transfer roller unit) on page -194) 8. Reinstall the BTR Assembly.
4.2.40.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Upper Cover. 2. Remove the BTR Assembly. (BTR Assembly (Transfer roller unit) on page -194) 3. Push down on the rear of the Chute Assembly and use the blade of a small screwdriver to free the rear latches from the Cover. 4. Push down on the front of the Chute Assembly and use the blade of a small screwdriver to free the front latches from the Cover. 5. Remove the Left Chute Assembly. 6. Release the two springs and remove the Registration Roll Assembly from the Chute Assembly.
9. Close the Left Upper Cover.
1. Reinstall the Registration Roll Assembly onto the Chute Assembly. Make sure the cutout in the Chute Assembly capture the lips of the three bearings on the shaft. 2. Hook the free ends of the two springs into the holes in the Chute, so the springs lay on top of the bearings and secure the shaft to the Chute. 3. Position the Left Chute Assembly so the cutout for the Registration Senor is located opposite the Registration Sensor.
Figure 4-55. Removal of Left Chute Assembly
Rev.B
187
Chapter 4
4.2.41 Registration Chute Assembly

3. Align the four screw holes (two at each end) in the Registration Chute with the four screw holes in the printer frame. 4. Use two screws to secure the Chute to the front of the frame, and use two screws to secure the Chute to the rear of the frame. 5. Reinstall the Magnet Plate to the printer frame, and use one screw to secure the Plate. 6. Reinstall the Inner Cover to the frame, and use one screw to secure the Cover. 7. Reinstall the Left Upper Cover Assembly. 8. Reinstall the Registration Clutch. (Left Upper Cover Assembly on page -185) 9. Reinstall the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192)
4.2.41.1 Removal
1. Remove the Left Upper Cover Assembly. (Left Upper Cover Assembly on page -185) 2. Remove the Registration Clutch.(Registration Clutch on page -184) 3. Remove the screw securing the Inner Cover to the printer frame, and remove the Inner Cover. 4. Remove the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 5. Remove the screw securing the Magnet Plate to the printer frame, and remove the Plate. 6. Remove the two screws (under the Magnet Plate) securing the front of the Registration Chute to the printer frame. 7. Remove the two screws (under the Registration Clutch) securing the rear of the Registration Chute to the printer frame, and remove the Chute. 8. Disconnect P/J103 from the Registration Sensor.
1. Reconnect P/J103 to the Registration Sensor. 2. Reinstall the Registration Chute Assembly into the printer frame.Make sure the mylar strip is on the outside of the Chute. Figure 4-56. Removal of Registration Chute Assembly
Rev.B
188
Chapter 4
4.2.42 Registration Roll Assembly

4.2.42.1 Removal
1. Remove the Registration Chute Assembly. (Registration Chute Assembly on page -188) 2. Remove the E ring fro the rear of the Registration Roll Shaft. 3. Slide the Shaft to the rear to free the front of the Shaft from the front bearing. 4. Remove the Registration Roll Assembly.
1. Make sure both the front and rear bearings are in place in the frame. 2. Slide the rear of the Registration Roll Shaft through the rear bearing. 3. Slide the front of the Shaft to the front bearing. 4. Use one E ring to secure the rear of the Shaft to the rear bearing. 5. Reinstall the Registration Chute Assembly. (Registration Chute Assembly on page -188)
Figure 4-57. Removal of Registration Roll Assembly
Rev.B
189
Chapter 4
4.2.43 Registration Sensor

1. Reconnect J103 to the Registration Sensor. 2. Insert the Sensor into the cutout in the Registration Chute Assembly. 3. Press in on the Sensor unit it snaps into place. 4. Close the Left Upper Cover.
1. Open the Left Upper Cover. 2. Squeeze in all four Sensor latches while you pull the Sensor out of the Registration Chute Assembly. 3. Disconnect J103 from the rear of the Sensor.
Figure 4-58. Removal of Registration Sensor
Rev.B
190
Chapter 4
4.2.44 ROS Assembly

(See ROS Assembly on page -274)
3. Make sure you have not trapped any wire harnesses under the ROS Assembly. 4. Use four screws to secure the ROS Assembly to the printer frame.
4.2.44.1 Removal
1. Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply. (Low Voltage Power Supply(LVPS) Assembly on page -215) 2. Disconnect the J106, J207, J407, and J430 from the ROS. 3. Remove the four screws that secure the ROS to the printer frame. 4. Lift the ROS Assembly off of the printer frame. 5. Place the ROS Assembly on a flat and stable surface.
C A U T IO N
5. Reconnect J106, J207, J407, and J430 to the ROS. 6. Reinstall the LVPS. (Low Voltage Power Supply(LVPS) Assembly on page -215)
Do not remove covers of disassemble the ROS Assembly. There are no replaceable parts of field adjustable points located inside the ROS Assembly.
1. Reinstall the ROS Assembly onto the printer frame.
C H E C K P O IN T
The small PWB mounted on the side of the ROS Assembly should be near the HVPS and MCU side of the printer frame.
2. Reposition the ROS Assembly until the two locating pins mounted on the bottom of the ROS drop into locating holes that are cut into the printer frame.
Figure 4-59. Removal of ROS Assembly
Rev.B
191
Chapter 4
4.2.45 EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge)

(See Xerography and Development Transport Chute Assembly on page -274)
4.2.45.1 Removal
1. Open the Duplex Unit. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover.
C A U T IO N
Do not attempt to remove the EP Cartridge without first opening the LEFT Upper Cover.
3. Open the Front Left Cover (Cover Assembly FL). 4. Pull up on the orange handle and slide the EP Cartridge half way out of the printer. 5. Hold on to the top handle and slide the EP Cartridge out of the printer. 6. If you are removing the EP Cartridge as part of another RRP, place the EP Cartridge in a covered box or cover it with a dark cloth to protect it from exposure to light.
Figure 4-60. Removal of EP Cartridge
1. Open the Duplex Unit. 2. Open the Left Upper Cover.
C A U T IO N
Do not attempt to install the EP Cartridge without first opening the Left Upper Cover.
3. Open the Front Left Cover Assembly (Cover Assembly FL). 4. Hold the EP Cartridge by the top handle and carefully slide the EP Cartridge into the printer.
Rev.B
192
5. Release the top handle and allow it to fold out of the way, then slide the EP Cartridge the rest of the way into the printer. 6. Push firmly on the end of EP Cartridge to make sure it is correctly seated in the printer. 7. Hold the edges of the EP Cartridge and pull out, to make sure the EP Cartridge is latched in place.Do not hold the handle when pulling out. You will release the EP Cartridge latch. 8. Close the Front Left Cover. 9. Close the Left Upper Cover 10. Close the Duplex Unit.
Chapter 4
Rev.B
193
Chapter 4
4.2.46 BTR Assembly (Transfer roller unit)

4. Position the BTR so the BTR gear on one end of the Roll is to the rear. 5. Press the ends of the BTR into the BTR Sleeves. The BTR snaps into place. 6. Rotate both levers toward to you lock the BTR in place. 7. Close the Left Upper Cover.
4.2.46.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Upper Cover. 2. Face the left side of the printer. 3. Hole the rear BTR lever in your left hand and the front BTR lever in you right hand. 4. Rotate both levers away from you to unlock the BTR. 5. With both levers back, lift the BTR out of the Cover Assembly.
C A U T IO N
Do not touch the sponge roll surface of the BTR. Grease and dirt on, or physical damage to the BTR will effect print quality.
1. Open the Left Upper Cover Assembly. 2. Face the left side of the printer. 3. Hold the BTR by the end levers.
C A U T IO N

Do not touch the sponge roll surface of the BTR. Grease and dirt on, or physical damage to the BTR will effect print quality. If BTR Assembly is exchanged, be sure to reset the TR Counter. (See Maintenance Mode on page -46)
Figure 4-61. Removal of BTR Assembly
Rev.B
194
Chapter 4
4.2.47 Toner Sensor

1. Reinstall the Toner Sensor and attached springs. (refer to the figure for correct positioning). 2. Route the attached wire harness along the channel and through the small opening in the rear of the frame. 3. Press the Toner Sensor into the cutout in the bottom of the EP Cartridge cavity. 4. Press and release the Toner Sensor to make sure it has a springaction return. 5. Reconnect P/J127 to the MCU PWB. 6. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 7. Reinstall the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 8. Close the Left Upper Cover.
4.2.47.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Disconnect P/J127 from the MCU PWB. 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Remove the EP Cartridge.(EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 5. Use the flat blade of a screwdriver to pry up the front end of the Toner Sensor (refer to the figure below). 6. When the front end is freed, remove the Sensor along with the attached wire harness.
Figure 4-62. Removal of Toner Sensor
Rev.B
195
Chapter 4
4.2.48 CRU Interlock Switch

1. Line up the two positioning holes on the CRU Interlock Switch with the two position tabs on the printer frame. 2. Use one screw to secure the Switch to the frame. 3. Reconnect J234 to the Interlock Switch wire harness. 4. Reconnect J232 and J233 to the Interlock Switch. 5. Reinstall the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 6. Reinstall the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192)
4.2.48.1 Removal
1. Remove the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 2. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Disconnect J232 and J233 from the CRU Interlock Switch. 4. Disconnect J234 from the Interlock Switch wire harness. 5. Remove the screw securing the CRU Interlock Switch to the printer frame, and remove the Switch.
Figure 4-63. Removal of CRU Interlock Switch
Rev.B
196
Chapter 4
4.2.49 Fuser Assembly

(See Fuser Assembly on page -276)
W A R N IN G
5. Firmly push the Fuser Assembly to make sure J12 is mated correctly with P12. 6. Tighten the two thumb screws to secure the Fuser Assembly to the printer frame. 7. Close the Left Upper Cover and the Left Front Cover.
C A U T IO N
The fuser is extremely hot. Switch off printer main power and wait at least thirty minutes for the Fuser to cool down before attempting to work on or remove the Fuser Assembly.
If Fuser is exchanged, be sure to reset the Fuser Counter. (See Maintenance Mode on page -46)
4.2.49.1 Removal
1. Open the Left Upper Cover. 2. Open the Left Front Cover. 3. Pull out the handles that are located on each end of the Fuser Assembly. 4. Loosen the two thumb screws that secure the Fuser Assembly to the printer frame. 5. Pull the Fuser out of the printer.
1. Open the Left Upper Cover. 2. Open the Left Front Cover 3. Position the Fuser Assembly with J12 on the left end of the Assembly aligned with P12 mounted on the printer frame. 4. Hold on to the Fuser handles and slide the Fuser Assembly into the printer frame. Figure 4-64. Removal of Fuser Assembly
Rev.B
197
Chapter 4
4.2.50 Fuser Drive Assembly

(See Fuser Drive Assembly on page -282)
4.2.50.1 Removal
1. Remove the Fuser Assembly. (Fuser Assembly on page -197) 2. Remove the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 3. Remove the Offset Unit Assembly. (Offset/Exit Assembly on page -200) 4. Disconnect J23 from the AC Driver PWB and free the wire harness from the harness clips. 5. Disconnect FB (red wire) from the HVPS and free the wire harness from the harness clips. 6. Remove P204 wire harness from the Fuser Drive Assembly. 7. Disconnect J104, J600, and J602. 8. Remove the two screws securing the Fuser Drive Assembly to the printer frame, and lift the Assembly off of the frame. 9. Remove the screw securing the green ground wire to the printer frame. 10. Pull up and remove the Fuser Drive Assembly.
Figure 4-65. Removal of Fuser Drive Assembly
Rev.B
198
Chapter 4
1. Reinstall the Fuser Drive Assembly onto the printer frame. (Refer to the figure for correct positioning) 2. Align the Assembly so the screw holes and locating holes in the Assembly line up with the screw holes and locating tabs on the frame. 3. Use two screws to secure the Assembly to the frame. 4. Reinstall the green ground wire to the printer frame, and use one screw to secure the wire. 5. Reconnect J104, J600, and J602. 6. Reinstall P204 wire harness to the Fuser Drive Assembly. 7. Reconnect FB (red wire) to the HVPS and secure the wire harness under the harness clips. 8. Reconnect J23 to the AC Driver PWB and secure the wire harness under the harness clips. 9. Reinstall the Offset Unit Assembly. (Offset/Exit Assembly on page -200) 10. Reinstall the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 11. Reinstall the Fuser Assembly. (Fuser Assembly on page -197)
Rev.B
199
Chapter 4
4.2.51 Offset/Exit Assembly

(See Exit Lower Chute on page -277 and Exit Upper Chute Assembly on page -279)
6. Reinstall the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 7. Reinstall the Fuser Full Cover.(Fuser Full Cover on page -138)
4.2.51.1 Removal
1. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138) 2. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Open the Duplex Unit. 4. Open the Upper Left Cover. 5. Remove J104, J209, J601, and J602 from the Offset Unit Assembly. 6. Remove the three screws (one screw at the front of the Assembly, next to the solenoid, and two screws at the rear of the Assembly) securing the Offset Unit to the printer frame. 7. Lift the Offset Unit up and off of the printer frame.
1. Open the Duplex Unit. 2. Open the Upper Left Cover. 3. Reinstall the Offset Unit onto the printer frame. 4. Use three screws (one screw at the front of the Assembly, next to the solenoid, and two screws at the rear of the Assembly) to secure the Offset Unit to the printer frame. 5. Reconnect J104, J209, J601, and J602 to the Offset Unit Assembly. Figure 4-66. Removal of Offset/Exit Assembly
Rev.B
200
Chapter 4
4.2.52 Exit Drive Assembly

(See Exit Drive Assembly on page -280)
1. Align the Exit Drive Assembly with the Offset Unit Assembly so the white drive gear and shaft fit through the corresponding opening in the Exit Drive Assembly. 2. Press the Exit Drive Assembly onto the Offset Unit, slightly repositioning the Assembly so the positioning pin on the upper right side of the Offset Unit fits through the corresponding hole in the Exit Drive Assembly. Make sure you do not trap any wire harnesses between the Exit Drive Assembly and the Offset Unit Assembly. 3. Use three screws to secure the Exit Drive Assembly to the Offset Unit Assembly. 4. Reinstall the Offset Unit Assembly. (Offset/Exit Assembly on page -200)
4.2.52.1 Removal
1. Remove the Offset Unit Assembly.(Offset/Exit Assembly on page -200) 2. Remove the three screws securing the Exit Drive Assembly to the Offset Unit Assembly. 3. Pull the Exit Drive Assembly straight out and away from the Offset Unit.
Figure 4-67. Removal of Exit Drive Assembly
Rev.B
201
Chapter 4
4.2.53 Exit Gate Solenoid

(See Exit Lower Chute on page -277)
1. Position the Exit Gate Solenoid so the wire harness faces up. 2. Reinstall the Solenoid onto the Offset Assembly, making sure the crossbar of the solenoid plunger latches onto the Solenoid Link. 3. Use two screws to secure the Solenoid to the Assembly. 4. Reconnect J210. 5. Secure the wire harness to the harness clips. 6. Reinstall the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138)
4.2.53.1 Removal
1. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138) 2. Disconnect J210 from the Exit Gate Solenoid. 3. Remove the wire harness from the harness clips. 4. Remove the two screws securing the Exit Gate Solenoid to the Offset Assembly, and remove the Solenoid.
Figure 4-68. Removal of Exit Gate Solenoid
Rev.B
202
Chapter 4
4.2.54 Offset Motor

1. Insert the Motor arm into the Offset Roll Rack. 2. Reconnect J209 to the Offset Motor. 3. Reinstall the Offset Motor onto the Offset Assembly. 4. Use two screws to secure the Motor to the Assembly. 5. Reinstall the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138)
4.2.54.1 Removal
1. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138) 2. Remove the two screws securing the Motor to the Offset Assembly. 3. Lift the Motor off of the Assembly and free the Motor arm from the Offset Roll Rack. 4. Disconnect J209 from the Offset Motor.
Figure 4-69. Removal of Offset Motor
Rev.B
203
Chapter 4
4.2.55 Face Up Exit Sensor

4.2.55.1 Removal
1. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138) 2. Disconnect J109. 3. Remove the two screws securing the Face Up Exit Sensor to the Exit Sensor Bracket and remove the Sensor. 4. Remove the two screws securing the Exit Sensor Bracket to the Lower Chute, and remove the Bracket. 5. Unhook the Exit Sensor Spring from the Bracket, and remove the Exit Sensor Actuator.
1. Reinstall the Exit Sensor Actuator onto Exit Sensor Bracket. 2. Hook the Exit Sensor Spring onto the Bracket. 3. Reinstall the Bracket onto the Lower Chute, and use two screws to secure the Bracket. 4. Reinstall the Face Up Exit Sensor onto the Bracket, and use two screws to secure the Sensor. 5. Reconnect J109. 6. Reinstall the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138)
Figure 4-70. Removal of Face Up Exit Sensor
Rev.B
204
Chapter 4
4.2.56 Offset Roller Assembly

(See Offset Roller on page -278)
5. Reinstall the Face Up Exit Sensor. (Face Up Exit Sensor on page -204) 6. Reinstall the Offset Motor. (Offset Roller Assembly on page -205)
4.2.56.1 Removal
1. Remove the Offset Drive Assembly. (Exit Drive Assembly on page -201) 2. Remove the Offset Motor. (Offset Motor on page -203) 3. Remove the Face Up Exit Sensor. (Face Up Exit Sensor on page -204) 4. Remove the Gear located at the end of the Roller Assembly. 5. Remove the K clip securing the Roller shaft to the rear bearing. 6. Slide the bearing out of the Offset Assembly frame. 7. Slide the front bearing out the Assembly frame, and remove the Offset Roller Assembly.
7. Reinstall the Offset Drive Assembly. (Exit Drive Assembly on page -201)
1. Slide the rear of the Roller shaft through the rear bearing cutout in the Assembly frame. 2. Insert the front bearing, still attached to the front of the shaft, into the front bearing cutout in the Assembly frame. Figure 4-71. Removal of Offset Roller Assembly 3. Use a K clip to secure the shaft to the rear bearing. 4. Reinstall the Gear onto the rear of the shaft. The Gear snaps into place.
Rev.B
205
Chapter 4
4.2.57 Lower Chute Assembly

4. Reinstall the Offset Roller Assembly.(Offset Roller Assembly on page -205)
4.2.57.1 Removal
1. Remove the Offset Roller Assembly. (Offset Roller Assembly on page -205) 2. Remove the five screws securing the Lower Chute to the Exit Assembly frame, and separate the Lower Chute from the frame. 3. Release J104 wire harness from the harness clips. 4. Squeeze the latches to unlock the Fuser Exit Sensor, and remove the Sensor from the Lower Chute.
1. Reinstall the Fuser Exit Sensor by pressing the Sensor latches into the cutouts in the Lower Chute.
C H E C K P O IN T
Make sure you install the Sensor with the wire harness positioned to the rear of the Lower Chute, and the Sensor actuator moving freely though the cutout below the Sensor.
Figure 4-72. Removal of Lower Chute Assembly
2. Secure J104 wire harness under the harness clips located on the Lower Chute. 3. Reinstall the Lower Chute to the Exit Assembly frame. Use five screws to secure the Lower Chute.
Rev.B
206
Chapter 4
4.2.58 Upper Chute Assembly

(See Exit Upper Chute Assembly on page -279)
3. Use three screws to secure the Lower Chute to the frame. 4. Open the Upper Chute Assembly and tighten the rear screw securing the Face Up Lower Chute to the frame. 5. Reconnect P/J 210 and route the wire harness under the harness clips. 6. Reconnect P/J 133 and route the wire harness under the harness clips. 7. Reinstall the Offset Roller Assembly. (Offset Roller Assembly on page -205)
4.2.58.1 Removal
1. Remove the Offset Roller Assembly. (Offset Roller Assembly on page -205) 2. Disconnect P/J 133 and free the wire harness from the harness clips. 3. Disconnect P/J 210 and free the wire harness from the harness clips. 4. Open the Upper Chute Assembly and loosen, do not remove, the rear screw securing the Face Up Lower Chute to the frame. 5. Remove the three rear screws that secure the Lower Chute to the frame. 6. Carefully pull the frame far enough to the rear to free the rear hinge of the Upper Chute. 7. Pull the Upper Chute to the rear and free the front hinge and remove the Upper Chute Assembly.
1. Reinstall the front hinge of the Upper Chute Assembly into the cutout at the front of the frame. 2. Carefully pull the frame far enough to the rear so you can slip the rear hinge of the Upper Chute into the cutout at the rear of the frame.
Figure 4-73. Removal of Upper Chute Assembly
Rev.B
207
Chapter 4
4.2.59 Exit Roll Assembly

(See Offset Roller on page -278)
7. Reinstall the Exit Drive Assembly. (Exit Drive Assembly on page -201)
4.2.59.1 Removal
1. Remove the Exit Drive Assembly. (Exit Drive Assembly on page -201) 2. Remove the two screws securing the Face Up Lower Chute to the Assembly frame, and remove the Chute. 3. Remove the K clip securing the Gear located at the rear of the Exit Roll shaft, and remove the Gear and rear bearing. 4. Remove the E ring securing the front of the Exit Roll shaft to the Assembly frame, and remove the front bearing. 5. Slide the shaft to the rear, and remove the shaft from the Assembly.
1. Reinstall the Exit Roll Assembly by sliding the rear of the shaft through the bearing cutout at the rear of the Assembly frame. 2. Slide the front of the shaft into the bearing cutout at the front of the Assembly frame. 3. Reinstall both front and rear bearings. 4. Use an E ring to secure the front of the shaft. 5. Slide the Gear onto the rear of the shaft and use a K clip to secure the Gear. 6. Reinstall the Face Up Lower Chute, and use two screws to secure it to the Assembly frame. Figure 4-74. Removal of Exit Roll Assembly
Rev.B
208
Chapter 4
4.2.60 Full Stack Sensor

(See Exit Upper Chute Assembly on page -279)
1. Reinstall the Full Stack Sensor by pressing the Sensor latches into the cutouts in the Offset Assembly.
C H E C K P O IN T
4.2.60.1 Removal
1. Remove the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138) 2. Disconnect J133 and remove the wire harness from the harness clips. 3. Squeeze the latches to unlock the Full Stack Sensor, and remove the Sensor from the Offset Assembly.
Make sure you install the Sensor with the wire positioned to the rear of the Offset Assembly, and the Sensor actuator moving freely through the cutout below the Sensor.
2. Reconnect J133 and secure the wire harness under the harness clips. 3. Reinstall the Fuser Full Cover. (Fuser Full Cover on page -138)
Figure 4-75. Removal of Full Stack Sensor
Rev.B
209
Chapter 4
4.2.61 Inverter Clutches

(See Appendix Exit Drive Assembly on page -280)
4. Reinstall the CW Gear onto the CW Clutch shaft. 5. Reinstall the CCW Gear on to the CCW Clutch shaft. 6. Route the wire harness under the harness clips and reconnect P/J 218 and P/J 219. 7. Carefully reinstall the Drive Support onto the Inverter Bracket, making sure the Clutch shafts fit into the bearings in the Support. 8. Use four screws to secure the Drive Support to the Inverter Bracket. 9. Reinstall the Exit Drive Assembly. (Exit Drive Assembly on page -201)
4.2.61.1 Removal
1. Remove the Exit Drive Assembly.(Exit Drive Assembly on page -201) 2. Remove the four screws securing the Drive Support to the Inverter Bracket, and lift the Support off of the Bracket. 3. Disconnect P/J 218 and P/J 219, and free the wire harness from the harness clips. 4. Slide the CCW Gear off of the CCW Clutch. 5. Slide the CW Gear off of the CW Clutch. 6. Lift the CCW Clutch off of the bearing, and remove the Clutch. 7. Lift the CW Clutch off of the bearing, and remove the Clutch.
1. Reinstall the two bearings into the cutouts in the Inverter Bracket. 2. Position the CW Clutch so the gear faces away from the Bracket, and insert the shaft at the rear of the Clutch into the bearing. Make sure the notch in the Clutch hooks onto the tab on the Bracket. (Refer to the figure for correct positioning). 3. Position the CCW Clutch so the gear faces away from the Bracket, and insert the shaft at the rear of the Clutch into the bearing. Make sure the notch in the Clutch hooks onto the tab on the Bracket. (Refer to the figure for correct positioning).
Figure 4-76. Removal of Inverter Clutches
Rev.B
210
Chapter 4
4.2.62 Main Drive Assembly

(See Main Drive Assembly on page -281)
4.2.62.1 Removal
1. Remove the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192)
C A U T IO N
Do not attempt to remove the Main Drive Assembly without first removing the EP Cartridge.
2. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Open the Left Upper Cover. 4. Remove the Left Cover Interlock Switch Assembly. (Left Cover Interlock Switch Assembly on page -219) 5. Remove the screw securing the Inner Cover to the printer frame, and remove the Inner Cover (See Figure on your right).
Figure 4-77. Removal of Main Drive Assembly
Rev.B
211
Chapter 4
9. Disconnect P/J 462 from the MCU PWB. 6. Disconnect J205 from the Main Motor PWB. 7. Release the wire harness that is located just above the Main Motor PWB from the wire clip and move the harness out of the way. 8. Remove the screw securing the green ground wire to the Main Drive Assembly, and move the ground wire out of the way (Figure below). 10. Disconnect P/J 202, J209, J600, and J601. 11. Remove the three screws securing the Harness Support to the Main Drive Assembly, and move the Harness Support and attached harness out of the way. 12. Remove the three self-tapping screws securing the Main Drive Assembly to the printer frame. The bottom right screw also secures a ground wire (with attached resistor) to the printer frame. 13. Remove the screw that secures a ground strap at the bottom left of the Main Drive Assembly. 14. Lift the Exit Gear out of the way, and pull the Main Drive Assembly straight back and out of the printer frame.
C H E C K P O IN T
If you are having difficulty removing the Main Drive Assembly, check to make sure there are no wire harness in the way, the Registration Clutch location notch in not in the way, and that the drive pin on the Drive Assembly is in the center of the cutout in the printer frame.
Figure 4-78. Removal of Main Motor PWB
Rev.B
212
Chapter 4
1. Remove the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192) 2. Open the Left Upper Cover. 3. Push all of the wire harnesses out of the way. 4. Rotate the Registration Clutch and the Feed Clutch so the location notches are not in the way of Main Drive installation. 5. Lift the Exit Gear out of the way and slide the drive pin at the back of the Main Drive Assembly into the large opening in the printer frame. 6. Make sure there are no wire harnesses trapped between the Drive Assembly and the printer frame. 7. Reach around through the open Left Upper Cover and take hold of the drive pin. Center the pin in the printer frame opening while you push the Drive Assembly against the frame. 8. Use one screw to secure the ground strap at the bottom left of the Main Drive Assembly. 9. Use a self-tapping screw to secure the ground wire with the attached resistor and the Main Drive Assembly to the printer frame. 10. Use three self-tapping screws to finish securing the Main Drive Assembly to the printer frame. 11. After securing the Main Drive Assembly, wiggle the Assembly to make sure it is firmly in place. 12. Position the Harness Support against the Main Drive Assembly.
13. Rotate the Registration Clutch and in the Feed Clutch so the slots in the Clutches line up with the key on the Harness Support, then press the Support against the Main Drive Assembly. 14. Use three screws to secure the Harness Support to the Main Drive Assembly. 15. Reconnect P/J 202, J209, J600, and J601. 16. Reconnect P/J 462 to the MCU PWB. 17. Reinstall the green ground wire to the screw hole at the top of the Main Drive Assembly, and use one screw to secure the wire to the Assembly. 18. Secure the wire harness at the top of the Main Drive Assembly to the wire clip that is located just above the Main Motor. 19. Reconnect J205 to the Main Motor PWB. 20. Reinstall the Inner Cover and use one screw to secure the Cover to the printer frame. 21. Reinstall the Left Cover Interlock Switch. (Left Cover Interlock Switch Assembly on page -219) 22. Reinstall the Rear Cover.(Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 23. Reinstall the EP Cartridge. (EP Cartridge (Toner Cartridge) on page -192)
Rev.B
213
Chapter 4
4.2.63 Main Power Switch

(See Power Inlet and LVPS on page -283)
1. Slide the Main Switch into the opening in the top of the Main Switch Bracket. It snaps into place. 2. Reconnect the four wires to the Switch. Follow the illustration below when reconnecting the wires. The illustration represents the underside of the Main Switch Bracket and Main Switch.
4.2.63.1 Removal
1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly.(Top Cover Assembly on page -139) 2. Remove the screw securing the Main Switch Bracket to the Power Supply Assembly. 3. Pull the Bracket and Switch up and away from the Power Supply. 4. Disconnect the four wires from the Switch. 5. Squeeze the two clips on the underside of the Switch while you slide the Switch out the top of the Bracket.
Figure 4-80. Pin position of Main Switch 3. Reinstall the Main Switch Bracket onto the Power Supply Assembly. Make sure you align the screw hole in the Bracket with the screw hole in the Power Supply. 4. Use one screw to secure the Bracket to the Power Supply Assembly. 5. Reinstall the Top Cover Assembly.(Top Cover Assembly on page -139) Figure 4-79. Removal of Main Power Switch
Rev.B
214
Chapter 4
4.2.64 Low Voltage Power Supply(LVPS) Assembly

4. Reinstall the wire harnesses into the harness clips at the rear of the LVPS. 5. Slide the LVPS into place in the printer frame. Make sure you do not trap the Main Switch wires between the LVPS and the printer frame. Align the LVPS so the five screw holes in the LVPS line up with the five screw holes in the printer frame. 6. Use five screws to secure the LVPS to the printer frame.
4.2.64.1 Removal
1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly.(Top Cover Assembly on page -139) 2. Remove the Right Cover. (Right Cover on page -141) 3. Remove four screws securing the ESS Assembly to the LVPS, and tilt the ESS Assembly back and out of the way. 4. Remove the Main Power Switch. 5. Remove the five screws securing the LVPS to the printer frame. 6. Pull the LVPS a few inches out so you can access the rear of the Power Supply. 7. Disconnect J1, J235, J501, and J502 from the LVPS. 8. Remove the wire harnesses from the harness clips at the rear of the LVPS. 9. Remove the LVPS Assembly.
7. Reinstall the Main Power Switch. (Main Power Switch on page -214) 8. Reinstall the ESS Assembly and use four screws to secure it to the top of the LVPS. 9. Reinstall the Right Cover.(Right Cover on page -141) 10. Reinstall the Top Cover Assembly.(Top Cover Assembly on page -139)
1. Position the LVPS Assembly above the printer frame, with the LVPS Fan facing the rear of the printer. 2. Route the four black and white Main Power Switch wires to the rear of the LVPS. 3. Reconnect J1, J235, J501, and J502 to the LVPS. Figure 4-81. Removal of LVPS Assembly
Rev.B
215
Chapter 4
4.2.65 AC Driver PWB

(See HVPS and MCU PWB on page -284)
5. Reinstall the ESS Assembly and use four screws to secure it to the LVPS. 6. Reinstall the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 7. Reinstall the Top Cover Assembly. (Top Cover Assembly on page -139)
4.2.65.1 Removal
1. Remove the Top Cover Assembly.(Top Cover Assembly on page -139) 2. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly.(Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 3. Remove the four screws securing the ESS Assembly to the LVPS, and tilt the Assembly back and out of the way. 4. Remove the two screws securing the Bracket and AC Drive PWB to the frame. The Bracket will fall off when you remove the two screws. Do not lose the Bracket. 5. Disconnect the four P/Js that are attached to the AC Drive PWB. 6. Squeeze the four latches securing the PWB to the printer frame and remove the PWB.
1. Align the four holes in AC Drive PWB to the four latches on the frame and press the PWB into place. 2. Reconnect the four P/Js to the AC Drive PWB. 3. Reinstall the Bracket under the frame so it sandwiches SSR1 and SSR2 between it and the frame. 4. Use two screws to secure the Bracket and SSR1 and SSR2 to the frame. Figure 4-82. Removal of AC Driver PWB
Rev.B
216
Chapter 4
4.2.66 High Voltage Power Supply(HVPS) Assembly

4. Use two screws to secure the HVPS Assembly into place on the printer frame. 5. Reconnect J500, DTS, FB, CB, and BTR to the HVPS PWB.
4.2.66.1 Removal
1. Remove the MCU PWB.(MCU(Machine Control Unit) PWB on page -220) 2. Disconnect J500, DTS, FB, CB, and BTR from the HVPS PWB.
C A U T IO N
6. Reinstall the MCU PWB. (MCU(Machine Control Unit) PWB on page -220)
The PWB is easily broken. Use care when removing the P/Js from the HVPS PWB. Use your fingers to hold down the PWB while you carefully disconnect each P/J.
3. Remove the two screws, one on the left side and one on the right side, that secure the HVPS Assembly to the printer frame. 4. Pull out on the HVPS Assembly while your release the two clips, one at the top and one on the right side, that secure the HVPS to the printer frame. 5. Remove the HVPS Assembly from the frame.
1. Reinstall the HVPS Assembly onto the printer frame. Figure 4-83. Removal of HVPS 2. Align the two positioning holes on the HVPS with the two tabs on the frame. Make sure you do not trap any wire harnesses between the HVPS Assembly and the printer frame. 3. Push the HVPS against the frame until the two clips snap into place.
Rev.B
217
Chapter 4
4.2.67 Noise Filter PWB

4.2.67.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Disconnect J19, F55, and F56 from the Noise Filter PWB. 3. Remove the two screws securing the Noise Filter PWB to the printer frame. 4. Squeeze the two latches securing the PWB to the printer frame, and remove the PWB.
1. Align the two holes in the left side of the Noise Filter PWB with the two plastic latches on the printer frame, and press the PWB into place. 2. Use two screws to secure the Noise Filter PWB to the printer frame. 3. Reconnect J19, F55, and F56 to the Noise Filter PWB. 4. Reinstall the Rear Cover.(Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) Figure 4-84. Removal of Noise Filter PWB
Rev.B
218
Chapter 4
4.2.68 Left Cover Interlock Switch Assembly

6. Position the Switch Bracket against the printer frame, slightly down from the screw hole in the printer frame. 7. Raise the Bracket so the aligning key at the bottom of the Switch meshes with the slot in the printer frame. The key and slot keep the Bracket from moving during operation. 8. Align the screw hole in the Bracket with the screw hole in the Frame. 9. Use one screw to secure the Interlock Switch Assembly to the printer frame. 10. Open and close the Left Upper Cover to make sure the Switch functions correctly. 11. Reconnect F5230 and F5231 to the Interlock Switch. 12. Reinstall the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140)
4.2.68.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Disconnect F5230 and F5231 from the Interlock Switch. 3. Remove the screw that secures the Interlock Switch Bracket to the printer frame, and pull the Assembly out of the printer. 4. Rotate the Switch Lever so it is straight up, and slide it off of the Bracket. 5. Press the two clips securing the Switch to the Bracket and push the Switch out of the Bracket.
1. Position the Switch against the opening in the Bracket so the two wire terminals are on the outside of the Bracket, away from the screw hole. 2. Press the Switch into the Bracket. It snaps into place. 3. Position the Switch Lever against the Switch, with the foot of the Lever facing out. 4. Rotate the Switch Lever so it is straight up, and slide it onto the Bracket. Press and release the Lever to make sure it is functioning correctly. 5. Open the Duplex Unit and the Left Upper Cover. Figure 4-85. Removal of Left Cover Interlock Switch
Rev.B
219
Chapter 4
4.2.69 MCU(Machine Control Unit) PWB

4.2.69.1 Removal
1. Remove the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140) 2. Disconnect the seventeen P/Js that are connected to the MCU PWB. 3. Remove the four screws securing the MCU Bracket to the printer frame, and remove the Bracket and the attached MCU PWB. 4. Remove the six screws securing the MCU Cover to the MCU Bracket, and remove the Cover.
C A U T IO N

Wear an electrostatic wrist strap and use caution when working with the MCU PWB. Static electricity can damage the sensitive electronics of the MCU. Handle the MCU PWB by the edges of the PWB or by the plastic connectors mounted on the board. Never touch any of the ICs that are mounted on the PWB.
Figure 4-86. Removal of MCU PWB
5. Place the Bracket and MCU on a flat, non-conductive surface. 6. Remove the four screws securing the MCU PWB to the MCU Bracket. 7. Hold on to one of the plastic connectors mounted on the PWB, and lift the MCU off of the Bracket.
Rev.B
220
Chapter 4
1. Place the Bracket on a flat, non-conductive surface. 2. Hold on to the edges of the PWB or one of the plastic connectors mounted on the board, and reinstall the MCU into the Bracket. Position the MCU so the connectors are on the right. 3. Use four screws, one in each corner, to secure the MCU PWB to the Bracket.
C A U T IO N
Do not overtighten these four screws. Overtightening may crack the PWB.
4. Reinstall the MCU Cover onto the MCU Bracket. Position the Cover so the three screw tabs are on the right and aligned over the three screw holes in the center of the MCU PWB. 5. Use six screws to secure the MCU Cover to the MCU Bracket. 6. Reinstall the MCU PWB Bracket onto the printer frame. Make sure you do not trap any wire harnesses between the Bracket and the frame. 7. Use four screws to secure the Bracket to the printer frame. 8. Reconnect the seventeen P/Js to the MCU PWB. 9. Reinstall the Rear Cover Assembly. (Rear Cover Assembly on page -140)
Rev.B
221
Chapter 4
4.2.70 Controller Board

(See Controller Assembly on page -285)
4. Remove harness from the connector parts(CN14,CN19, CN20, and CN21) on the controller board. 5. Removes twelve screws that secure the controller board. (A wire of CN14 is secured by one fixing screw of ESS Cover) 6. Remove 2 screws that secure the I/F bail lock parts of the controller board to the ESS Box, and remove controller board.
4.2.70.1 Removal
1. Remove Top Cover Assembly. (Top Cover Assembly on page -139) 2. Remove the fourteen screws that secure the ESS Cover to the ESS Box.
Figure 4-88. Removal of Controller Board Figure 4-87. Removal of ESS Cover 3. Lift the ESS Cover off of the ESS Box.
Rev.B
222
Chapter 4
4.2.71 ESS Box

4.2.71.1 Removal
1. Remove the ESS Cover. 2. Disconnect CN14, CN19, CN20 and CN21 form the controller board and remove the wire harness from the wire clamps. Then, release the wire harness from the wire clamps and pull the harness free of the ESS Box. 3. Remove the four screws securing the ESS Box to the printer frame, and remove the Box.
1. Reinstall the ESS Box onto the printer frame. Align the ESS Box so the cutout for the ESS PWB faces the rear of the printer. 2. Use four screws to secure the ESS Box to the printer frame. 3. Route the wire harness along the outside back of the ESS Box and through the grommet at the rear of the Box. 4. Use the wire clamps to secure the wire harness to the Box. There are two clamps along the outside back of the ESS Box, and two clamps on the interior of the ESS Box. 5. Reconnect CN14, CN19, CN20 and CN21 of the controller board. 6. Reinstall the ESS Cover. Figure 4-89. Removal of ESS Box
Rev.B
223

ADJUSTMENT
No adjustment is necessary for this printer.
Chapter 5
Adjustment
Rev.B
225

MAINTENANCE
Chapter 6
Maintenance
6.1 Maintenance
This section explains about maintenance of the printer. Lubrication and adhesion points are not really regulated for this printer. However, there are some exchange units by the users are regulated.
6.1.1 Exchange Units and Parts by User

Any units or parts that user can change are listed below. Refer to the figure on your right. Table 6-1. Exchange Units and Parts
Reference No. in the figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Fuser BTR (Transfer Roller) Feed Roll (Tray1) Feed Roll (Tray2) Feed Roll (Tray3) Feed Roll (Tray4) Feed Roll (Tray5) Name EP Cartridge Life (Page volume, oneside printing) 20000 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000 300000
C A U T IO N

If the fuser is exchanged, be sure to perform Fuser Counter Clear. (See Maintenance Mode on page -46) If BTR(transfer roller) is exchanged, be sure to perform TR Counter Clear. (See Maintenance Mode on page -46) If Feed Roll is exchanged, be sure to perform LC1 5 Counter Clear. (See Maintenance Mode on page -46) Figure 6-1. Exchange Units and Parts
Rev.B
227

APPENDIX
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.1 Connector Pin Diagram

7.1.1 Pin Alighnment
Figure on next page shows major component of wiring diagram in this printer.
Rev.B
229
Chapter 7
Appendix
Figure 7-1. Major Component Connecting Diagram
Rev.B
230
Chapter 7
Table 7-2. P/J Location Table Location Map
page -235 page -236 page -236 page -234 page -235 page -235 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -237 page -237 page -237 page -237 page -237 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236
Appendix
7.1.2 How to use P/J location Table and Map

Use the table and maps in this section to locate specific P/J connectors within the printer. To find the location of a P/J: 1. Locate the P/J connector number in the first column of the table. 2. Find the page number for the corresponding map in the second column. 3. Go to that page and find the connector. P/J
103 104 105 106 107 108
Connected to
Tray 1 Level Sensor Fuser Exit Sensor Tray 1 Paper Size Sensor SOS Sensor MSI Size Sensor MSI No Paper Sensor Face Up Exit Sensor MCU PWB Full Stack Sensor Tray 2 No Paper Sensor Tray 2 Level Sensor Tray 2 Size Sensor Take Away Roll Sensor Tray 2 Left Cover Interlock Switch Registration Clutch Take Away Clutch Feed Clutch 1 Lift Up Motor 1 Fuser Fan Main Motor
Other end connected to

P/J459 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J461 MCU PWB P/J456 MCU PWB P/J403 MCU PWB P/J403 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB Toner Sensor P/J462 MCU PWB P/J408 MCU PWB P/J408 MCU PWB P/J408 MCU PWB P/J408 MCU PWB P/J607 and P/J408 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J403 MCU PWB P/J460 MCU PWB P/J460 MCU PWB
Table 7-1. P/J Location Table

109
P/J
1
Location Map
page -235 page -238 page -236 page -234 page -238 page -238 page -238 page -235 page -235 page -235
Connected to
LVPS (110VAC)

Main Switch F52/F53
127 133 140
12 13 19 20 23 100 101 102
Fuser Heat Rods & STS Finisher AC voltage connector Output - Noise Filter PWB AC Drive PWB AC Drive PWB Registration Sensor Take Away Roll 1 Sensor Tray 1 No Paper Sensor
J23 AC Drive PWB & J600 CE11 & CE12 (110VAC line) F51/F53 AC Hot and AC N P/J12 Fuser Heat Rods & STS P/J459 MCU PWB P/J403 MCU PWB P/J459 MCU PWB
141 142 143 144 200 201 202 203 204 205
Rev.B
231
page -234 page -235 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236 page -236
Chapter 7
page -236 page -234 page -236
Appendix
P/J
207 208 209 210 218 219 232 233 234
Connected to
Scanner Motor Assembly MSI Feed Clutch Offset Motor Exit Gate Solenoid Inverter CW Clutch Inverter CCW Clutch Interlock Switch 2 Interlock Switch 1 CRU Switch 1 and CRU Switch 2 LVPS Fan Tray 2 Feed Clutch Tray 2 Lift Up Motor MCU PWB MCU PWB

P/J456 MCU PWB P/J403 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB P/J458 MCU PWB P/J458 MCU PWB P/J407 Laser Diode Driver P/J456 MCU PWB P/J401 MCU PWB P/J408 MCU PWB P/J408 MCU PWB P/J501 & P502 LVPS P/J477 AC Drive P/J235 Fuser Fan P/J422 - ESS Mother PWB
P/J
406 407 408
Connected to
MCU PWB Laser Diode Driver MCU PWB

P/J480/P/J481 HCF Cabinet PWB P/J456 MCU PWB P/J140 No Paper Sensor 2 P/J141 Level 2 Sensor P/J142 Size 2 Paper Sensor P/J143 Take Away Roll 2 Sensor P/J144 Left Cover 2 Interlock Switch P/J240 Tray 2 Feed Clutch P/J241 Tray 2 Lift Up Motor Type D0 Console P/J430 Laser Diode Driver Controller P/J501/502 LVPS PWB P/J417 Control Panel PWB P/J402 MCU PWB ESS Mother PWB P/J606 CRU - CRU Memory P/J106 SOS Sensor P/J207 ROS Motor P/J234 CRU Interlock P/J407 Laser Diode Driver
410 CN20 CN14 CN21
page -236 -page -235 -----
MCU PWB Controller Control Panel Controller Controller Controller Laser Diode Driver MCU PWB MCU PWB
235 240 241 400 401
page -238 page -237 page -237 page -236 page -236
CN19 430
--page -234 page -236 page -236
402 403
page -236 page -236
MCU PWB MCU PWB
454 P/J107 MSI Size Sensor P/J108 MSI No Paper Sensor P/J208 MSI Feed Clutch P/J611 Duplex Module P/J612 Mailbox or P612 Finisher 456
404 405
page -236 page -236
MCU PWB MCU PWB
Rev.B
232
page -236 page -236 page -236
Chapter 7
page -236 page -236
Appendix
P/J
457 458 459
Connected to
MCU PWB MCU PWB MCU PWB

P/J500 HVPS P/J233 Interlocks SW1 and SW2 P/J100 Registration Sensor P/J102 No Paper 1 Sensor P/J103 Level 1 Sensor P/J204 Fuser Fan P/J205 Main Motor P/J105 Size Sensor 1 P/J202 Feed Clutch 1 P/J201 Take Away Roll 1 Clutch P/J200 Registration Clutch P/J104 Fuser Exit Sensor P/J601 Face Up Exit Sensor P/J601 Full Stack Sensor P/J601 Exit Gate Solenoid P/J218 Inverter CW Clutch P/J219 Inverter CCW Clutch P/J401 MCU PWB Test output connector P/J478 AC Drive PWB P/J457 MCU PWB P/J420 ESS Mother PWB P/J400 MCU PWB P/J420 ESS Mother PWB P/J400 MCU PWB
P/J
600 601
Connected to
Fuser STS P109 Face Up Exit Sensor P133 Full Stack Sensor P210 Exit Gate Solenoid P218 Inverter CW Clutch P219 Inverter CCW Clutch P/J604 MSI P107 MSI Size Sensor J108 MSI No Paper Sensor P200 MSI Feed Clutch P/J143 Take Away Roll Sensor P/J144 Tray 2 Left Cover Interlock Switch P/J473 Duplex PWB

P/J462 MCU PWB P/J462 MCU PWB
602
page -236
P/J642 MCU PWB
460
page -236
MCU PWB
461 462
page -236 page -236
MCU PWB MCU PWB
603 604
page -235 page -235
P/J403 MCU PWB P/J403 MCU PWB
607
page -237
P/J408 MCU PWB
611 A,B 612 A,B 607
page -237
P/J404 MCU PWB
477 478 499 500 501
page -238 page -238 page -234 page -236 page -235 page -238 page -235 page -238
AC Drive PWB AC Drive PWB Test output connector HVPS LVPS
page -237
P/J800 Mailbox PWB P/J830 Finisher PWB P/J143 Take Away Roll Sensor P/J144 Tray 2 Left Cover Interlock Switch P/J406 MCU PWB
P/J405 MCU PWB
page -237
P/J408 MCU PWB
613 A~D
page -237
P/J480 Finisher PWB P/J481 Finisher PWB
502
LVPS
Rev.B
233
page -238
Chapter 7
Appendix
P/J
F51~5 4
Connected to
Main Power Switch

P/J19 Noise Filter PWB P/J20 AC Drive PWB P/J1 LVPS PWB AC Power Cord Hot AC Power Cord Neutral P/J458 MCU PWB
F55 F56 F 5230 F 5231 BTR
page -238 page -238 page -236 page -237 page -236 page -237 page -237
Noise Filter PWB Noise Filter PWB Main Interlock Switch
Main Interlock Switch
P/J458 MCU PWB
Bias Transfer Roll
HVPS
CB
page -237
Charge Roll
HVPS
DTS
page -237
Detack Saw
HVPS
DB T4
page -237 page -238
Magnet Roll Frame Ground
HVPS P/J1 LVPS PWB
Figure 7-2. P/J Location Map1
Rev.B
234
Chapter 7
Appendix
Rev.B
235
Chapter 7
Appendix
Rev.B
236
Chapter 7
Appendix
Rev.B
237
Chapter 7
Appendix
Rev.B
238
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.1.3 Signal Information

Table 7-8. Signal Name
Signal Name FUSER$MAIN FUSER$SUB RELAY$FUSER FAN$HI FAN#FAIL Description Switches Main Heat Rod. Low=On. High=Off Switches Heat Rod 2. Low=On. High=Off Fuser relay control that switches AC to the Heat Rods. Low=On. High=Off Switches Fuser Fan speed. Low=High speed. High=Low speed Monitors Fuser Fan. Low=Operating correctly. High=Not operating correctly.
Figure 7-10. AC InNoise Filter LVPS C262 Main Controller Board AC Drive PWB D0 Console
Rev.B
239
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name CNPN$BUZR +CNPN$LED CNPN$PWR4 CNPN$PWR3 CNPN$PWR2 CNPN$PWR1 LCD$DATA7 LCD$DATA6 LCD$DATA5 LCD$DATA4 LCD$ENB LCD$RS CNPN#SW1 CNPN#SW2 Description Control Panel buzzer LED synch. High=Off. Low=On Key synch. High=Key pressed. Low=Key not pressed Source for Key and LED. High=On. Low=Off Source for Key and LED. High=On. Low=Off Source for Key and LED. High=On. Low=Off Logic line for Controller LCD Logic line for Controller LCD Logic line for Controller LCD Logic line for Controller LCD LCD Controller write signal. LCD Controller register select signal. High=Data register. Low=Instruction register Key synch. High=Key pressed. Low=Key not pressed Key synch. High=Key pressed. Low=Key not pressed
Figure 7-11. ConsoleC262 Main Controller
Rev.B
240
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name /SBSY /STA /CMD /PCLK Description Status busy signal. Low=Transmitting signal. High=Not transmitting Status from MCU to ESS Command from ESS to MCU Clock signal which is sent from the printer to ESS, and command timing for sending the status. Clock speed is 9600 bps Clock signal for status and command timing - ESS to MCU. Clock speed 9.6kHz ~ 500kHz Command busy signal - ESS to MCU Low=ESS is transmitting command. High=ESS is not transmitting. Status indicating MCU initialization is complete and printer is On-Line. Low=Printer initialization complete. High=Printer initialization not complete Status indicating ESS initialization is complete. Low=ESS initialization complete. High=ESS initialization not complete Status indicating that the MCU is ready to accept control commands. Low=Accept commands. High=Ignore commands Command from ESS to the MCU to begin a print cycle. Low=Start. High=Do not start. Starts print cycle only when /RDY is also Low. Command from the ESS to the MCU to feed paper Video data synch signal from MCU to ESS Command to select the No Paper signal Video data synch signal from MCU to ESS Video data signal from the ESS Low=Black, High=White
/CCLK /CBSY
/PPRDY
/CPRDY
/RDY
/START
/PRFD /TOP DSEL /BD
Figure 7-12. C262 Main Controller ESS PWB MCU PWB
VOUT
Rev.B
241
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name CRU#DET DA$DATA LD$ENB APC$CNT RMOT$ON RMOT$SP1 RMOT$SP2 RMOT#RDY ROS#SOS Description Monitors CRU presence. High=CRU installed. Low=CRU not installed Data used to set laser Enables laser - MCU to the LD Drive. High=No enabled. Low=Enabled Monitors APC count Controls Scanner Motor. High=Off. Low=On Controls Scanner Motor speed. SP3-1 -010=Standby. SP3-1-110=480dpi. SP3-1-011=600dpi. Controls Scanner Motor speed. SP3-1 -010=Standby. SP3-1-110=480dpi. SP3-1-011=600dpi. Monitors Scanner Motor speed. Low=Speed correct. High=Speed not correct. Monitors start of scan. High=Off. Low=On
Figure 7-13. ROS
MCU PWB
Rev.B
242
Chapter 7
Appendix
Figure 7-14. Toner Sensor Xerographic CRU MCU PWB Table 7-12. Signal Name
Signal Name CRUM$PWR CRU$CLK CRU$DATA TNR#EMP Description Switches CRUM power. Clock signal for CRU Memory CRU Memory data Monitor toner quantity in the ET Cartridge. Low=Quantity is low. Hiigh=Enough quantity. Signal Name BTR#MON BTR$SEL BTR$RMT DTS$ON BCRAC$CLK BCRDC$ON DBAC$CLK DB$ON
Figure 7-15. HVPS M CU PWB Table 7-13. Signal Name

Description Monitors BTR current level Switches BTR voltage. High=Positive voltage. Low=Negative voltage Controls the current value to the BTR Switches Detack Saw and Chute Bias voltage. High=Off. Low=On Controls the AC voltage value to the BCR. Negative logic Switches BCR voltage. High=Off. Low=On Controls the AC voltage value to the Magnet Roll. Negative logic Switches DB voltage. Negative logic
Rev.B
243
Chapter 7
Appendix
Figure 7-16. Fuser Fan Main Motor Interlock SM1&SM2 MCU PWB Table 7-14. Signal Name
Signal Name MMOT$PWM MC#CLK FFAN$PWR FAN$LOW FUSER$FAIL INTLK#SW1 Description Switches Main Motor. High=Off. Low=On. Monitors the speed of the Main Motor. Switches the Fuser Fan. High=On. Low =Off Switches the speed of the Fuser Fan. High=Low speed. Low=High speed Monitors the Fuser Fan. Low=Operation correct. High=Operation incorrect Monitors Left Cover interlock switch. High=Cover open. Low=Cover closed.
Rev.B
244
Chapter 7
Signal Name SNR#SIZEM SNR#SIZE SNR#NOPM SNR#NOP CL$FEEDM CL$FEED MSI#DET ENV#DET EMOT$ON SNR#FEED MOT$LIFT1(TTL) SNR#TAROL1 Description
Appendix
Analog signal from the MSI Size Sensor. Voltage levels 0VDC~5VDC Analog signal from the Envelope Size Sensor. Voltage levels 0VDC~5VDC Monitors level of paper in the MSI. High=No paper present. Low=Paper present Monitors level of paper in the Envelope Feeder Controls MSI paper feed. High=No feed. Low=Feed Controls Envelope feed. High=No feed. Low=Feed Monitors presence of MSI. High=MSI not present. Low=MSI present Monitors presence of Envelope Feeder. High=Envelope Feed not present. Low=Envelope Feeder present Switches Envelope Feed Motor. High=Off. Low=On Monitors paper between Envelope Feeder and base engine. High=Paper present Low=No paper Switches Tray 1 Lift Up Motor. High=On. Low=Off Monitors paper between Tray 2 and Tray 1. High=Paper present. Low=No paper
Figure 7-17. TRAY1 MCU PWB-MSI MCU PWB-ENVELOPE FEEDER MCU PWB
Rev.B
245
Chapter 7
Appendix
Figure 7-18. Size 1 Sensor Registration Sensor No-Paper1 Sensor Level 1 Sensor MCU PWB Table 7-16. Signal Name
Signal Name SNR#SIZE1 SNR#REGI SNR#NOP1 SNR#LVL1 Description Analog signal from the Tray 1 Size Sensor. Voltage levels 0VDC~5VDC Monitors paper flow at the Registration Sensor. High=Paper present. Low=No paper Monitors level of paper in Tray 1 Monitors position of Tray 1. High=Not in position. Low=In position
Rev.B
246
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name CL$FEED1 CL$RGATE STS#FSR SNR#FEXIT SNR#FUT SOL$GATE CL$ICCW CLS$ICW OMOT$FWD OMOT$REV SNR#STK Description Controls Tray 1 paper feed. High=No feed. Low=Feed Controls Registration Clutch. High=Clutch off. Low=Clutch on Fuser Heat Roll temperature. Analog signal. Monitors paper leaving the Fuser. High=Paper present. Low=Paper not present Monitors paper arriving at the Face Up output tray. High=Paper not present. Low=Pape present Controls Gate Solenoid. High=Face Down output. Low=Face Up output. Controls Inverter CCW Clutch. High=Off. Low=On Controls Inverter CW Clutch. High=Off. Low=On Controls forward motion of the Offset Motor. High=On. Low=Off Controls reverse motion of the Offset motor. High=On. Low=Off Monitors the Full Stack Sensor. High=Tray full. Low=Tray not full
Figure 7-19. Other Clutch and Sensor, Offset Mother, Exit Gate Solenoid MCU PWB
Rev.B
247
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name OPT$TX+ OPT#RX+ MBS#DET FSNR#DET Description Status of Finisher or Mailbox sent to MCU. High=Mark. Low=No mark Status of MCU sent to the Finisher or Mailbox. High=Mark. Low=No mark Monitors presence of Mailbox. High=Mailbox not installed. Low=Mailbox installed Monitors presence of Finisher. High=Finisher not installed. Low=Finisher installed
Figure 7-20. Multibin Finisher MCU PWB
Rev.B
248
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name OPT$TX+ OPT#RX+ DUP#DET DREGI INV SW CL$ICW CL$ICCW INTLK#DUP SNR#DEXIT SNR#DWAIT SOL$DGATE /A, A, /B, B Description Status of Duplex Module sent to MCU. High=Mark. Low=No mark Status of MCU sent to the Duplex Module. High=Mark. Low=No mark Monitors presence of a Duplex Module. High=Duplex Module installed. Low=Duplex Module not installed Monitors paper at the Registration Sensor. High=Paper present. Low=Paper not present Monitors paper at the Fuser Exit Sensor. High=Paper present. Low=Paper not present Switches the Inverter CW Clutch. High=Off. Low=On Switches the Inverter CCW Clutch. High=Off. Low=On Monitors the Duplex Cover Interlock Switch. High=Cover open. Low=Cover closed. Monitors paper at the Duplex Exit Sensor. High=Paper present. Low=Paper not present Monitors paper at the Duplex Wait Sensor. High=Paper present. Low=Paper not present Switches the Duplex Exit Gate Solenoid. High=Off. Low=On Pulse signals sent by the Duplex PWB to rotate the Duplex Motor
Figure 7-21. Duplex PWB MCU PWB
Rev.B
249
Chapter 7
Appendix

Signal Name SNR#SIZE2 SNR#NOP2 SNR#TAROL2 SNR#LVL2 L/H#INTLK CL$FEED2 MOT$LIFT2 Description Analog signal from the Tray 2 Size Sensor. Voltage levels 0VDC~5VDC Monitors level of paper in Tray 2. High=No paper present. Low=Paper present Monitors paper between Tray 2 and Tray 3. High=Paper present. Low=No paper Monitors position of Tray 2. High=Not in position. Low=In position Monitors the Left Cover Interlock Switch. High= Cover open (switch off). Low=Cover closed (switch on). Controls Tray 2 paper feed. High=No feed. Low=Feed Switches Tray 2 Lift Up Motor. High=On. Low=Off
Figure 7-22. Tray2 Component MCU PWB
Rev.B
250
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.2 Board Component Layout

7.2.1 C262 Main Board Component
a01
Figure 7-23. C262 Main Component
Rev.B
251
Chapter 7
Appendix
a02
Figure 7-24. C262 Main Component Layout (Soldered side)
Rev.B
252
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3 Parts List

7
7.3.1 Top Cover Assembly
6
(J204)
PL11.4.23
Table 7-21. Parts Name for Top Cover Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 COVER ESS STOPPER FAN ASSEMBLY FUSER COVER-FUSER FULL
s 1 (with 2,3) 2
Unit / Parts Name COVER ASSEMBLY (with 2,3) TOP COVER LABEL SWITCH CONSOLE PANEL ----9
PL11.3.16
(J417)
FR
ON
SER501FC
Figure 7-25. Top Cover Assembly
Rev.B
253
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.2 Front Cover
Table 7-22. Parts Name for Front Cover

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 99 STUDIO DOCKING SPRING EME FRONT BRACKET DOCKING LEFT --BRACKET DOCKING REAR KIT TRAY2 MOUNTING (8,10,12) Unit / Parts Name COVER ASSEMBLY SPRING TORSION COVER F/R PLATE MAGNET DOCT BOTTOM -----
Figure 7-26. Front Cover
Rev.B
254
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.3 Rear, Left and Right Cover
Table 7-23. Parts Name for Rear, Left and Right Cover
No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 COVER RH COVER ASSEMBLY, REAR OEM COVER REAR 1TM, OEM Unit / Parts Name COVER INNER, LH
Figure 7-27. Rear, Left and Right Cover
Rev.B
255
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.4 Tray Unit - Paper Stack

8
E
Table 7-24. Parts Name for Tray-Unit Paper Stacker

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 PLATE BOTTOM PAD BOTTOM PLATE TONGUE SHAFT ASSEMBLY -TONGUE BEARING GUIDE ASSEMBLY -SIDE LEVER SHAFT SPRING PLATE SIDE ACTUATOR LINK SPRING TORSION STOPPER L/F HOUSING -TRAY WASHER WASHER - SIDE GUIDE
E
Unit / Parts Name TRAY ASSEMBLY (with 2-18 and Tray Unit-End Guide)
3 1 (with2~18,PL2.2) 2 7 9 10
E
s PL2.2.1
11 s
s s 14 18
E
17 12 PL2.2.2 6 s 17 13 s s 5
16
N FRO
T
s
15
SER504FB
Figure 7-28. Tray Unit-Paper Stack
Rev.B
256
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.5 Tray Unit - End Guide
Table 7-25. Parts Name for Tray Unit-End Guide

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 99 Unit / Parts Name GUIDE ASSEMBLY - END PLATE ASSEMBLY - END ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY CABLE ASSEMBLY SPRING - EXTENSION PULLEY GUIDE ACTUATOR KIT CASSETTE CABLES (with 4 and 5)
Figure 7-29. Tray Unit -End Guide
Rev.B
257
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.6 Tray Interface -Tray 1
Table 7-26. Parts Name for Tray Interface-Tray 1

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 99 STOPPER TRAY, F STOPPER TRAY, R SOACER, L LINK STOPPER SPRING TORSION KIT ACTUATOR SENSOR ASSY (with 3 and 4) Unit / Parts Name SW ASSEMBLY-PS MOTOR ASSEMBLY ACTUATOR-SNR SUPPORT ACTUATOR PHOTO INTERRUPTOR --CHUTE ASSEMBLY FRONT, 1T (for Tray1 only)
C H E C K P O IN T

All items, except item 7, in the list above can be used with both Tray 1 and Tray 2. Item 7 can be used only for Tray 1.
Figure 7-30. Tray Interface-Tray 1
Rev.B
258
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.7 Paper Pick Up - Tray 1
Table 7-27. Parts Name for Paper Pick Up-Tray1

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 97 98 99 GEAR-46T M/N CLUTCH ASSEMBLY GEAR ASSEMBLY 28T M/N (for Tray 1 only) CLUTCH ONE-WAY (for Tray 1 only) FEEDER ASSEMBLY M/N, XIP (with 6 -14) ROLL ASSEMBLY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY O.W. CLUTCH GEAR 25T BEARING SHAFT FEED M/N GEAR 31T GEAR 25T SUPPORT ASSEMBLY NUDGER BEARING KIT TRAY 1 CLUTCH (1 - 4) KIT FEED ROLL (with 6, Qty 6) KIT PICK UP GEAR TRAY 1 (with 1 and 3) Unit / Parts Name
C H E C K P O IN T

All items, except item 3 and 4, in the list above can be used with both Tray 1 and Tray 2. Item 3 and 4 can be used only for Tray 1.
Figure 7-31. Paper Pick Up-Tray1
Rev.B
259
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.8 Retard and Take Away-Tray 1
Table 7-28. Parts Name for Retard & Take Away-Tray1

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 98 99 GEAR 22 T, XIP SHAFT ASSEMBLY RET, XIP BEARING ROLL ASSEMBLY SPACER CLUTCH ASSEMBLY-FRICTION SUPPORT RETARD GEARING GEAR 22 SPACER GEAR STOPPER, XIP BEARING, R BEARING, C ROLLER ASSEMBLY S/F BEARING BEARING CHUTE ASSEMBLY FEED, OUT CHUTE ASSEMBLY FEED, IN GEAR 22/20, IOT H/N SUPPORT ASSEMBLY, SPRING SPRING RETARD FRAME RETARD ASSEMBLY TRAY1 HIGH (with 1 and 9-23) KIT TAKE AWAY GEAR TRAY 1 (with 2, 10, and 20) Unit / Parts Name RETARD ASSEMBLY, XIP (2 to 8)
Figure 7-32. Retard & Take Away-Tray1
Rev.B
260
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.9 Tray Interface-Tray 2
Table 7-29. Parts Name for Tray Interface-Tray2

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 99 STOPPER, TRAY F STOPPER, TRAY R SPACER, L LINK STOPPER SPRING TORSION KIT ACTUATOR SENSOR ASSY (with 3 and 4) Unit / Parts Name SW ASSEMMBLY PS MOTOR ASSEMBLY ACTUATOR -SNR SUPPORT ACTUATOR PHOTO INTERRUPTER --CHUTE ASSEMBLY FRONT, 2T(for Tray 2 only)
Figure 7-33. Tray Interface-Tray2
Rev.B
261
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.10 Paper Pick Up-Tray 2
Table 7-30. Parts Name for Paper Pick Up-Tray2

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 97 98 99 GEAR 46T M/N CLUTCH ASSEMBLY GEAR 28T M/N (for Tray2 and High Capacity Feed only) BEARING FEED (for Tray2 and High Capacity Feed only) FEEDER ASSEMBLY M/N, XIP (with 6 to 14) FOLL ASSEMBLY CLUTCH ASSEMBLY OW CLUTCH GEAR 25T BEARING SHAFT FEED M/N GEAR 31T GEAR 25T SUPPORT ASSEMBLY NUDGER BEARING KIT TRAY 2 CLUTCH (with 1- 4) KIT FEED ROLL (Qty 6 of item 6) KIT PICKUP GEAR TRAY2 (with 1 and 3) Unit / Parts Name
Table 7-31. Paper Pick Up-Tray2
Rev.B
262
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.11 Retard and Take Away- Tray 2
Table 7-32. Parts Name for Retard and Take Away-Tray2

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 98 99 SPRING BRACKET KIT RETARD TAKEAWAY TRAY2 (with 1 and 10, 11, 15, 17 and 18) KIT TAKE AWAY GEAR TRAY 2 (with 2, 10, and 20) BEARING CHUTE - F/O, 1TM, E CHUTE FEED, IN GEAR 22/20, C H/N --ROLLER ASSEMBLY, T/A --GEAR 22 BEARING GEAR STOPPER, XIP ----GEAR 22 T, XIP SHAFT ASSEMBLY RET, XIP BEARING ROLL ASSEMBLY SPACER CLUTCH ASSEMBLY-FRICTION SUPPORT RETARD --Unit / Parts Name RETARD ASSEMBLY, XIP (with 2 to 8)
Figure 7-34. Retard and Take Away-Tray2
Rev.B
263
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.12 Feed Drive Transmission
Table 7-33. Parts Name for Feed Drive Transmission

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 99 SUPPORT C/L T/A GEAR 31T GEAR 33T GEAR 16/22 LINK ASSEMBLY SPRING TORSION BEARING HARNESS CLAMP KIT FEED DRIVE REPAIR (with 1,2, and 6-11) GEAR 16T GEAR 30T SHAFT C/L T/A --Unit / Parts Name
Figure 7-35. Feed Drive Transmission
Rev.B
264
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.13 Multi Sheet Inserter and MSI/Duplex Support
Table 7-34. Parts Name for Multi Sheet Inserter and MSI/Duplex Support
No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Unit / Parts Name SUPPORT FRONT COVER SUPPORT REAR COVER MSI/DUPLEX CUPPORT ASSEMBLY HARNESS ASSEMBLY DRAWER( SPRING, DAMPER F SPRING DAMPER R MULTI SHEET INSERTER ASSEMBLY MSI TOP COVER MULTI SHEET TRAY SUPPORT MULTI SHEET INSERTER HINGE STUD MULTI SHEET TRAY SPRING MSI HARNESS CLAMP
11 s s
(J604)
6 PL11.4.15
(P603)
s 4 s s 5
7 (with 8~12,PL 4.2) 8 s s s
FR
ON
s 9 s
PL4.2 12 10
PL4.4
SER513FC
Figure 7-36. Multi Sheet Inserter and MSI/Duplex Support
Rev.B
265
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.14 MSI Feeder Assembly

3 2
E
Table 7-35. Parts Name for MSI Feeder Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 MSI LINK GEAR MSI DRIVE GEAR ASSEMBLY MSI DRIVE LINK SPRING MSI TIE PLATE MSI PAD MSI PAD PIN MSI PAD SHAFT MSI PAD SPRING MSI PAPER GUIDE MSI BRACKET MSI HOOK BRACKET FRONT MSI HOOK BRACKET REAR LATCH -FRONT MULTI SHEET INSERTER HOOK SPRING MSI LOWER CHUTE LATCH-REAR
PL 4.3.13
17 13 4
E
15 1 (with 2~17,PL 4.3)
Unit / Parts Name MSI FEEDER ASSEMBLY (with 2-17, PL4.3)
S S S
PL 4.3
12 7 5 6
S S S S
15
9 11
E
14
10 16
FR
ON
SER514FB
Figure 7-37. MSI Feeder Assembly
Rev.B
266
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.15 Upper Feeder Assembly
Table 7-36. Parts Name for Upper Feeder Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Unit / Parts Name UPPER FEEDER ASSEMBLY(with 2 -26) MSI FEED CLUTCH MSI FEED BEARING REAR 1 MSI FEED SHAFT MSI FEED GEAR MSI FEED BEARING REAR 2 MSI FEED SPRING MSI FEED BEARING FRONT MSI FEED ROLLER MSI NO PAPER SENSOR MSI NO PAPER SENSOR BRACKET MSI STOPPER MSI WIRE HARNESS (P604 < > J108/P107/P208) MSI NUDGER ROLLER ASSEMBLY(with 15 to 25) MSI NUDGER ROLLER SUPPORT MSI NUDGER GEAR COVER MSI NUDGER GEAR MSI NUDGER BEARING REAR MSI GATE MSI NUDGER ROLLER BEARING FRONT MSI NUDGER ROLLER SHAFT MSI NUDGER ROLLER MSI FRICTION CLUTCH MSI FRICTION CLUTCH SPACER MSI FRICTION CLUTCH GEAR UPPER FEEDER FRAME
19
SER515FB E
(J208)
E
2 3
13 1 (with 2~26)
(P604)
4
(J108)
PL4.4.4
E
12
(P107)
(P208)
S
26
PL4.1.12 5 6 8
E
12
E
15 23 24 25
8 9 10 11
S
16 17 18
E
20 21 22
E E
19 14 (with 15~25)
Figure 7-38. Upper Feeder Assembly
Rev.B
267
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.16 MSI Tray Assembly
Table 7-37. Parts Name for MSI Tray Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MSI PAD MSI SIDE GUIDE MSI SIZE SENSOR ASSEMBLY MSI SIZE GUIDE SPRING MSI SIZE GUIDE LINK MSI TARY LOWER COVER MSI TRAY MSI TRAY UPPER COVER Unit / Parts Name MSI TRAY ASSEMBLY(with 2 - 9)
Figure 7-39. MSI Tray Assembly
Rev.B
268
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.17 Tray 1 Frame and Left Cover
Table 7-38. Parts Name for Tray1 Frame and Left Cover
No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Unit / Parts Name PANCHI ROLL ASSEMBLY (with 2 to 7) HOLDING SPRING SHAFT SPRING CENTER BEARING END BEARING PINCH ROLLER PINCH ROLLER BRACKET COVER ASSEMBLY L/H, LOW (with9, 10 and 13)( GROUNDING METAL
S
(J101)
12
PL11.4.15 PL1.2.9
S S S
11
S
LEFT MIDDLE COVER

S
FRAME LH TAKE AWAY SENSOR 1 TAKE AWAY SENSOR SHIELD

1 (with 2~7)
7 5 4 6 2 3 5 4 2
13
FRO
NT
S
10
8 (with 9,10,13)
SER517FB
Figure 7-40. Tray1 Frame and Left Cover
Rev.B
269
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.18 Tray 2 Frame and Left Cover

S
17
S
16
(J144)
S
17 22
S
Table 7-39. Parts Name for Tray 2 Frame and Left Cover
No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Unit / Parts Name LEFT LOWER COVER ASSEMBLY(with 2,3, 9-11,14 and 23) LEFT LOWER COVER PINCHI ROLL ASSEMBLY(with 4-8, and 21) PINCH ROLL END BEARING PINCH ROLL CENTER BEARING PINCH ROLLER PINCH ROLL SPRING PINCH ROLL BRACKET LEFT LOWER COVER HANDLE ASSEMBLY FONT FRAME REAR FRAME FRONT HINGE REAR HINGE FEED OUT CHUTE LEFT LOWER COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH TRAY 2 WELL TIE PLATE SPRING-EME CAP TAKE AWAY SENSOR SUPPORT-REAR WASHER INTERLOCK/SENSOR HARNESS TAKE AWAY SENSOR SHIELD
S S S S S
(J607)
15
(J143)
PL11.4.13 19
20
18
S
1 (with 2,3,9,10,11,14,23) 14 3 (with 4~8,21) 9
8 4 12
21 4 5 5 7 11 13
S
21 10
S
7
S
23
2
S SER518FC
Figure 7-41. Tray 2 Frame and Left Cover
Rev.B
270
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.19 Registration
5 4 (with 5,6)
Table 7-40. Parts Name for Registration

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BEARING ROLLER ASSEMBLY REGISTRATION CHUTE ASSEMBLY REGISTRATION CHUTE REGISTRATION ELIMINATOR SENSOR RESISTOR ASSEMBLY FRAME -L/H
E
6 8 7
(J200)
S
Unit / Parts Name CLUTCH ASSEMBLY REGISTRATION
PL11.4.18
PL11.4.21
E
(J100)
1
S
FR
ON
T
2 9
SER519FB
Figure 7-42. Registration
Rev.B
271
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.20 Left Upper Cover Assembly

3 (with 4~14,PL 6.3) 2
Table 7-41. Parts Name for Left Upper Cover Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 SHAFT-HINGE SHAFT-HINGE GEAR m/n COVER ASSEMBLY L/H, XIP CHUTE LOWER GUIDE PAPER SPRING COMP CHUTE ASSEMBLY L/H SPRING EXTENSION ROLLER ASSEMBLY-REGISTRATION L/H CHUTE ASSEMBLY-REGISTRATION L/H GUIDE PAPER GUIDE PAPER PULLEY SUPPORT-L/H COVER
14
S S
Unit / Parts Name
13 12 7 (with 8~13) 10 11 9 8 8 6 5 1
13
S S
FR
PL 6.3
ON
14
T
SER520FA
Figure 7-43. Left Upper Cover Assembly
Rev.B
272
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.21 Transport Chute Assembly
Table 7-42. Parts Name for Transport Chute Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SHAFT-HINGE SHAFT-HINGE GEAR m/n COVER ASSEMBLY L/H, XIP CHUTE LOWER GUIDE PAPER SPRING COMP CHUTE ASSEMBLY L/H SPRING EXTENSION ROLLER ASSEMBLY-REGISTRATION L/H CHUTE ASSEMBLY-REGISTRATION L/H GUIDE PAPER GUIDE PAPER PULLEY FRAME-L/H, F FRAME-L/H, R HANDLE ASSEMBLY-L/H Unit / Parts Name
Figure 7-44. Transport Chute Assembly
Rev.B
273
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.22 ROS Assembly

PL11.4.12
(J407) (J106) (J207)
S
Table 7-43. Parts Name for ROS Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 ROS ASSEMBLY
(J416)
Unit / Parts Name
PL11.3.15
(J430)
S
FR
ON
T
SER522FC
Figure 7-45. ROS Assembly Figure 7-46.
Xerography and Development Transport

Chute Assembly
Rev.B
274
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.23 Xerography and Development

Table 7-44. Parts Name for Xerography and Development
No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 PLATE CONTACT C PLATE CONTACT D PWB STUD EP CARTRIDGE (Customer Replaceable Unit-CRU) Unit / Parts Name BTR ASSEMBLY (with 2-7) BTR FRONT LEVER BTR ROLL BTR BTR POSITIONING PIN BTR GEAR BTR GEAR LEVER BTR/DTS GUIDE ASSEMBLY (with 9-11) BTR/DTS GUIDE BRACKET BTR LEAD PLATE DTS LEAD PLATE DTS KUBJ ROD DTS LINK ROD TONER EMTPTY SENSOR TONER SENSOR SPRING CRU CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY (with 17-20) CRU CONNECTOR (J454<>J606) CRU CONNECTOR BRACKET CRU CONNECTOR SPRING STUD SCREW BTR GUIDE CB ASSEMBLY CRU INTERLOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY(with 24 and 25) CRU INTERLOCK SWITCH BRACKET CRU INTERLOCK SWITCH ASSEMBLY --FR ON T
PL 6.3
SER523FC E
PL11.4.20
(J232) (F5230) (J233)
23 (with 24,25) 25 28
S
(F5231)
S S S S
16 (with 17~20) 20
(J458)
19
(J234)
S
24
S
20 19
S
27
(J127)
14
PL11.4.12 29
(J454)
S
17
(J606) S
15
18 PL11.2.26
S
22
15
PL11.2.26
10
11
12 13
8 (with 9~11) 5 7 6 3 4 21 30
1 (with 2~7) 3 2
Figure 7-47. Xerography and Development
Rev.B
275
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.24 Fuser Assembly
Table 7-45. Parts Name for Fuser Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 Unit / Parts Name FUSER ASSEMBLY - 115V(Customer Replaceable UnitCRU) FUSER ASSEMBLY - 220V(Customer Replaceable UnitCRU)
Figure 7-48. Fuser Assembly
Rev.B
276
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.25 Exit Lower Chute
Table 7-46. Parts Name Exit Lower Chute

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Unit / Parts Name TRANSPORT ASSEMBLY FULL(with PL9.1, PL9.2, PL9.3, and PL9.4) SOLENOID ASSEMBLY LINK-SOLENOID SPRING OFFSET MOTOR LOWER CHUTE ASSEMBLY(with 7-15) PINCH ROLLER SPRING FRONT 1 PINCH ROLLER SPRING REAR 1 PINCH ROLLER SPRING FRONT 2 PINCH ROLLER FRONT PINCH ROLLER REAR FUSER ROLLER REAR LOWER CHUTE ELIMINATOR PINCH ROLL SPRING REAR 2 EXIT SENSOR EXIT ACTUATOR EXIT SESOR SPRING EXIT SENSOR BRACKET BRACKET ASSEMBLY-FRONT LOWER CHUTE-FACE UP FRAME ASSEMBLY-REAR EXIT HARNESS (J601<>J109/J133/J210)
Figure 7-49. Exit Lower Chute
Rev.B
277
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.26 Offset Roller

7
Table 7-47. Parts Name for Offset Roller

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 BEARING ROLLER ASSEMBLY-EXIT FUT GEAR-19 ASSEMBLY OFFSET ROLLER ASSEMBLY OFFSET RACK OFFSET BRACKET OFFSET ROLLER SLEEVE OFFSET ROLLER OFFSET ROLLER BEARING REAR OFFSET ROLLER BEARING FRONT OFFSET SHAFT OFFSET SHAFT PIN GEAR-19
2
K K
Unit / Parts Name

K
9 5 11 12
K
10
13 3 1 1
4 (with 5~12)
PL 9.1.13
FR
ON
T
PL 9.1.1
E
1
SER527FA
Figure 7-50. Offset Roller
Rev.B
278
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.27 Exit Upper Chute Assembly

PL9.1.23 4
(J133)
Table 7-48. Parts Name for Exit Upper Chute Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Unit / Parts Name CHUTE ASSEMBLY-UPPER SWITCH ASSEMBLY PLATE-TIE SPRING PLATE SPRING ASSEMBLY-PINCH, H SPRING ASSEMBLY-PINCH, I PINCH ROLLER, FRONT PINCH ROLLER, REAR EXIT UPPER CHUTE GUIDE PAPER GUIDE PAPER EXIT MIDDLE CHUTE EXIT GATE EXIT GATE SPRING SPRING ASSEMBLY -PINCH, J SPRING ASSEMBLY-PINCH, K
14 13 12 10 11 1 (with 2~16)
3 s 16 15
6 8 7 9 5
PL9.1.22
PL9.1.21 s
PL9.1.20
FR
ON
T
SER528FB
Figure 7-51. Exit Upper Chute Assembly
Rev.B
279
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.28 Exit Drive Assembly
Table 7-49. Parts Name for Exit Drive Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 INVERTER CW SHAFT INVERTER EXIT GEAR REAR INVERTER EXIT GEAR FRONT INVERTER ERACKET EXIT WIRE HARNESS (J602<>J218/J219) Unit / Parts Name EXIT DRIVE ASSEMBLY (with 2-19) EXIT DRIVE SUPPORT EXIT DRIVE IDLER PULLEY EXIT GEAR 1 EXIT GEAR 2 EXIT GEAR BRACKET EXIT IDLER GEAR EXIT RATCHET SPRING INVERTER COW GEAR INVERTER CLUTCH INVERTER CCW SHAFT BEARING INVERTER CW GEAR ---
Figure 7-52. Exit Drive Assembly
Rev.B
280
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.29 Main Drive Assembly
Table 7-50. Parts Name for Main Drive Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 Unit / Parts Name MAIN DRIVE ASSEMBLY HARNESS CLAMP
S
PL6.1.8 PL10.2.13
S S S
2
(J205)
S S
(P204)
PL11.4.23
(J460)
SER530FC
Figure 7-53. Main Drive Assembly
Rev.B
281
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.30 Fuser Drive Assembly

1 (with 2~9) 5
E
Table 7-51. Parts Name for Fuser Drive Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 GEAR 22T BRACKET ASSEMBLY BRACKET ASSEMBLY BRACKET SPRING BRACKET FRAME ASSEMBLY-EXIT, REAR STOPPER HOOK HARNESS CLAMP 1 HARNESS CLAMP 2 HARNESS CLAMP 3 DRAWER CONNECTOR (P12<>J23/J600) CONNECTOR P104 CONNECTOR P602 Unit / Parts Name FRAME ASSEMBLY EXIT REAR (with 2-9)
PL11.4.21 2 6 8 4 3
S S
(J23)
S
(J600)
(P12)
S S
7 12
(FB)
13
9
(P104)
14
15
(P602)
11
10
SER531FE
Figure 7-54. Fuser Drive Assembly
Rev.B
282
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.31 Power Inlet and LVPS

7
S
(J420) (F51~54) (J1) (J400)
Table 7-52. Parts Name for Power Inlet and LVPS

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Unit / Parts Name POWER INLET CONNECTOR NOISE FILTER PWB 100V/120V NOISE FILTER PWB 220V BRACKET-N/F PWB STUD HARNESS CLAMP MAIN POWER HARNESS (F51-F54/J1<>J13/J19/J20) MAIN SWITCH BRACKET ASSEMBLY SWITCH OUTLET BRACKET FINISHER PS ASSEMBLY-M4 100V/120V PS ASSEMBLY-M4 220V
10 9 4
S S S
PL11.4.12
(J501) (J502)
S S
6 PL11.4.12
(J20)
11
S
(J401) (J19) (J235)

S
(J13)
5
(P478)
S S
3
S S
(P499)
5 4
(F56)
PL11.2.21
S S S
(F55)
2
SER532FC
Figure 7-55. Power Inlet and LVPS
Rev.B
283
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.32 HVPS and MCU PWB
Table 7-53. Parts Name for HVPS and MCU PWB

No. in the Figure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 HCF CONNECTOR DUPLEX UNIT CONNECTOR MAIL BOX CONNECTOR OPTION CONNECTOR BRACKET HARNESS-ASEEMBLY, EXIT TRANSFORMER 220V HARNESS CLAMP 2 PWB SUPPORT HARNESS CLAMP 4 BRACKET AC-DRIVE --HVPS MCU ASSEMBLY MCU PWB BRACKET MCU COVR MCU --LEFT COVER INTERLOCK SWITCH INTERLOCK SWITCH BRACKET INTERLOCK SWITCH LEVER SUPPORT HARNESS HARNESS CHANNEL ----Unit / Parts Name AC DRIVER PWB 120V AC DRIVER PWB 220V -----
Figure 7-56. HVPS and MCU PWB
Rev.B
284
Chapter 7
Appendix
7.3.33 Controller Assembly
Table 7-54. Parts Name for Controller Assembly

No. in the Figure 1 4 8 9 10 11 14 15 16 17 BUSHS SADDLE BOX ASSEMBLY BUSH SADDLE COVER-ESS COVER-SIMM CONTROLLER BOARD HARNESS ASSEMBLY ROS V HARNESS ASSEMBLY CONSOLE CORE Unit / Parts Name CONTROLLER ASSEBLY
Figure 7-57. Controller Assembly
Rev.B
285

Epson EPL-N4000 - 4000+ Rev B Service Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Epson EPL-N4000 - 4000+ Rev B Service Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats



EPSON EPL-N4000 / EPL-N4000+

EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

Copyright 1998 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION. Printed in Japan.

About This Manual

Symbols Used in This Manual

To avoid permanent eye damage, follow these directions;

Disassembly and Assembly

Supported emulation PCL5e PostScript Level3*1 ESC/Page

FX, ESC/P2,1239X PJL, EJL RCC DIAG EpsonNet WebAssist

Table 1-1. Printer environment setting not by the panel setting

NOTE: O = Available -- = Not available

Firmware EPL-N4000 EPL-N4000 EPL-N4000+ EPL-N4000+

Print enable enable disable (invalid Adobe PS 3 kit error) enable

Finisher, HDD disable disable disable enable

EPSON Status Monitor 3 EPSON Net Direct Print

1.2 Changes from EPL-N4000 to EPL-N4000+

Setup Menu/Stacker Printing Menu/Staple

The following is added to the printer messages.

Invalid Adobe PS 3 kit

The following were added to the panel setting items.

PGI was added to ESC/Page Menu. ESC/Page was added to IES.

The following commands were added. Job clear (GS pcO)

MODIFIED ESCP2,FX The emulation target was designed for Euro.

DESIGNED FOR TYPE B OPTION LEVEL3

1.3 Basic Specification

CPU: 64-bit RISC CPU VR4700 133MHz

RAM RAM: SDRAM DIMMs adopted

CONTROL PANEL Control Panel:

Switch: LED: LCD:

8 switches 6 LEDs 20-character LCD

MOUNTING Fixed on main unit HDD OPTION

MISCELLANEOUS Mechanical control function is not built in.

1.3.2 Engine Specification

Feeding Method Table 1-6. Feeding Method

Paper Feeding Method Standard MP(Multi purpose tray)

10.8 TBD 10.8 TBD

a: ( ) is for custom size(unfixed form). b. High(large) Capacity Feeder is optional.

Within 60 seconds (at 23 C/rated voltage)

1.3.3 Paper Specification

Same as Cassette 2 Each 1000 TBD

Note): a.:With 75g/m2 paper.

Supported paper size: Paper Feed Standard: Paper Eject

Table 1-8. Paper Eject Volume

100 sheet x each 10 mail box

Note): a.L: b.P: c.--: d.O:

Guaranteed print area

1.3.4 Electrical Specification

Power Consumption (printer body) Table 1-9. Power Consumption

108 127V 50-60Hz3Hz Less than 9.6A Less than1180W TBD

Less than 45W

Less than 45W

Figure 1-2. Printable Area

Electrostatic Tolerance: Surge Current:

1.3.5 Reliability, Durability and Maintainability

Table 1-10. Dielectric strength

120V 3.5 mA or less 200V series 3.5 mA or less

Printing position reliability Table 1-12. Printing position

Main Scan direction Sub scan direction

Skew (See the figure on next page) Table 1-13. Skew

Main scan direction ( |c-d| ) Sub scan direction ( |a-b| )

NOTE: The measurements for MP Tray are based on one-side printing.

Start Page14 Offset Stacking Staple Staple position50